UG-Curriculum

(Structure and Course Contents)

With effect from July 2020 onwards

Mechanical Engineering
Punjab Engineering College
(Deemed to be University) Chandigarh
 CREDITS BREAK-UP FOR B.TECH. PROGRAMME (2020-21 onwards)

CURRICULAR COMPONENTS Credits

(A) Institute Core Courses (ICC)
a) Basic Sciences (BSC) 16
b) Engineering Sciences (ESC) 17
c) General Science (GSN) 04
Total 37
(B) Humanities, Communication and Management Elective Courses
12
(HSSMEC)
(C) Department Core Courses (DCC)
39
(including 3 credits of Minor Project)
(D) Departmental Elective Courses (DEC) 20
(E) Institute Open Elective Courses (GSE/ HSEC)
a) Courses 24
b) Project (Compulsory Major Project)- Inter disciplinary 06
Total 30
(F)Internship/ Course Work*
(4 credits of Deptt. Elective + 4 credits of Open Elective+ 4 credits of Project 12
Work ) * Optional
(G) Non Academic Courses (CCA) 10
Grand Total
160
(For those who do not opt for Honours)
(H) Honours 16
Grand Total
160+ 16
(For those who opt for degree with Honours)

Note: Minor Specialization will be given to a student who earns 16 credits from the basket of Open
Elective courses offered by any one department (outside the parent department). Major
Specialization will be given to a student who earns 16 credits in any one domain of Department
Elective courses offered by parent department. To get Honours, the student will have to complete
additional 16 credits of discipline open Electives.
 Semester wise UG Scheme to be implemented w.e.f. 2020-21 session
SEMESTER-I SEMESTER-II
S.No. Credits S.No. Credits
Orientation (including Introduction to
1 2 1 BSC-III (Mathematics) 4
Discipline course-1 credit 14 hours)
2 BSC-I (Mathematics) 4 2 BSC-IV/ BSC-II (Chemistry/ Physics) 4
3 BSC-II/ BSC-IV (Physics/ Chemistry) 4 3 ESC-I/ GSC-I & GSC-II 4
4 GSC-I & GSC-II/ ESC-I 4 4 ESC-II/ HSM-I 3
5 HSM-I/ ESC-II 3 5 ESC-IV/ ESC-III 2/3
6 ESC-III/ ESC-IV 3/2 6 ESC-V/ ESC-VI 2
TOTAL 20/19 TOTAL 19/20

SEMESTER-III SEMESTER-IV
S.No. Credits S.No. Credits
1 ESC-VII/ HSM-II 3 1 HSM-II/ ESC-VII 3
2 Deptt Core Courses (DCC) 12 2 Deptt Core Courses (DCC) 12
3 OE-I 4 3 OE-II 4
4 Industrial Tour 2 4 Proficiency-I 2
TOTAL 21 TOTAL 21

SEMESTER-V SEMESTER-VI
S.No. Credits S.No. Credits
1 DEC-I 4 1 Internship Training (Optional)
2 Deptt Core Courses (DCC) 12 Students opting for course work will do Deptt.
12
3 DEC-II 4 Elective (4 credits), Open Elective (4 credits)
4 Minor Project 3 and Project Work (4 credits)
TOTAL 23 TOTAL 12

SEMESTER-VII SEMESTER-VIII
S.No. Credits S.No. Credits
1 HSM-III 3 1 HSM-IV 3
2 DEC-III 4 2 DEC-V 4
3 DEC-IV 4 3 OE-V 4
4 OE-III 4 4 OE-VI 4
5 OE-IV 4 5 Discipline 2
6 Major Project-I 2 6 Proficiency-II 2
7 Major Project-II 4
TOTAL 21 TOTAL 23

ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS
Basic Science Course BSC Department Core Course DCC
Engineering Science Course ESC Department Elective Course DEC
General Science Course GSC Open Elective Course OE
Humanities, Social Sciences & Mgmt. HSM

Total Credits = 160 without Honours Total Credits = 160 + 16 with Honours

Note: Minor Specialization will be given to a student who earns 16 credits from the basket of Open Elective courses offered by any one
department (outside the parent department). Major Specialization will be given to a student who earns 16 credits in any one domain of
Department Elective courses offered by parent department. To get Honours, the student will have to complete additional 16 credits of
discipline Electives.
ESC-I Introduction to Computing Introduction to Electronics & electrical
ESC-IV
Engineering Drawing with CAD Engineering
ESC-II
Software ESC-V Introduction to Manufacturing
ESC-III Introduction to Mechatronics ESC-IV Strength of Materials
ESC-VII Artificial Intelligence

ESC-VII and HSM-II (in 3rd and 4th semesters) are common to all branches.
 Teaching Scheme for B. Tech. Mechanical Engineering
(Courses/Credit Distribution) (2021-22) onward
FIRST YEAR
Semester I
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
Orientation (1 Credit) +
OR1101 2
Introduction to Mechanical Engineering (1 Credit)
MA1101 BSC-I Mathematics: Calculus & Ordinary DE 4 3 1 0 BSC
PY1101 BSC-II Physics (Mechanics & Optics 4 3 0 2 BSC
GS1201/ GS1101 GSC-I & GSC-II Intr. to Environmental Sc. I & II 4 3 0 2 ESC
HS1101 HSM-I Communication Skill & Ethics 3 2 0 2 HSM
ES1301 ESC-III Introduction to Mechatronics 3 2 0 2 ESC
Total 20 13 1 8
* L-T-P (Lecture-Tutorial-Practical)

Semester II
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
MA1201 BSC-III Linear Algebra, Vector Calculus & PDE 4 3 1 0 BSC
CH1201 BSC- IV Chemistry: Applied Chemistry II 4 3 0 2 BSC
ES1101 ESC-I Introduction to Computing 4 3 0 2 GSC
ES1201 ESC-II Engineering Drawing & CAD 4 2 0 2 ESC
ES1401 ESC-IV Introduction to EC & EE 2 2 0 0 ESC
ES1601 ESC-VI Strength of Materials 2 2 0 0 ESC
Total 19 15 1 6
 SECOND YEAR
Semester III
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
HSM II HSM II 3 HSM
ME1031 Elements of Manufacturing Process 3 2 0 2 DCC
ME1032 Elements of Thermodynamics 3 3 0 0 DCC
ME1033 Mechanics of Material 3 2 1/2 2/2 DCC
ME1034 Theory of Machine 3 2 1/2 2/2 DCC
Open Elective Course-I 4 OE
Industrial Tour 2
Total 21

Semester IV
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
ME1041 Manufacturing Processes 3 2 0 2 DCC
ME1042 Applied Thermodynamics 3 2 1/2 2/2 DCC
ME1043 Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 3 2 1 0 DCC
ME1044 Mechanical Vibration 3 2 1/2 2/2 DCC
Open Elective Course-II 4 OE
ES1701 ESC-VII Artificial Int. & Machine Learning 3 ESC
Proficiency-I 2
Total 21
 THIRD YEAR
Semester V
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
ME1051 Production Engineering 3 2 1 0 DCC
ME1052 Production and Operation Management 3 3 0 0 DCC
ME1053 Heat and Mass Transfer 3 2 0 2 DCC
ME1054 Design of Mechanical System 3 3 0 0 DCC
Department Elective Course I 4 DEC
Department Elective Course-II 4 DEC
Minor Project 3 DCC
Total 23

Semester VI
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category

Internship (Optional) *
Students opting for course work will do Dept. 12 DCC
Electives (4 Cr), Open elective (4 Cr), Project
work (4 credits)
Total 12
*Internship Seminar presentations may be held a week before the date of Registration in Semester-I of 4 th Year

FOURTH YEAR
Semester VII
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
HSM-III 3 HSM
Department Elective Course-III 4 DEC
Department Elective Course-IV 4 DEC
Major Project-I 2 DCC
Open Elective Course-III 4 OE
Open Elective Course-IV 4 OE
Total 21

Semester VIII
Course Code Subject Credits L T P Category
HSM-IV 3 HSM
Department Elective Course-V 4 DEC
Open Elective Course-V 4 OEC
Open Elective Course-VI 4 OEC
Discipline 2
Proficiency-II 2
Major Project-II 4 DCC
Total 23
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Aerospace Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1
Lectures : 14 hrs
Total No. of Lectures – 14
Course Objectives:
1 To introduce various aspects of aerospace engineering
2 To make the students aware about challenges and opportunities in the field of aerospace engineering.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures

Aerospace: History and future (2)

1 History of aviation and space technology, Scope of Aerospace Engineering , Aerospace Industry,
Current status and future of Aerospace Industry.
Aspects of Aerospace Engineering (4)
2 Anatomy of Aircraft and spacecraft, Classification of aircrafts and space crafts, Brief introduction to:
Aircrafts instruments and systems, Aircraft structural components, Wind Tunnel: Utility
Basic understanding of flight (2)
3 Airfoils, lift, drag, Thrust, weight and moments, force diagram. Different phases of flight, VTOL and
STOL.
Aerospace Propulsion (2)
4 Introduction to different aerospace propulsion systems: Piston engine, Turboprop, Turbojet, Turbofan,
Ramjet, Scramjet, Pulsejet and Pulse detonation engine and Rocket propulsion.
5 Satellites (2)
Different Launch Vehicles, Accomplishment of ISRO
6 Aircraft Regulating Bodies (2)
Role of DGCA, AAI and MoCA, Introduction to airports.

Suggested Books:
S.No. Name of Books Year of Publication
1 Introduction to Flight by John D. Anderson Jr.,7 th Edition, Mc Graw Hill Pvt. Ltd. 2011
2 Aircraft Basic Science by Ralph D. Bent & James L. Mackinley. 1993
3 Flight without formulae by A.C. Kermode, 5th Edition, Pearson publication, 1989

Course Outcomes:
1 The students will be able to realize interesting aspects of aerospace engineering
2 The students will be able to describe important basic concepts of aerospace engineering
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Civil Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1
L T P : 100
Total No. of Lectures: 14
Course Objectives:
On completion of this course, the student shall be introduced to an overview of Civil Engineering profession and
the ethical responsibilities of engineering practice.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures

1 Structural Engineering: 3
Role of structural engineering in construction projects, Introduction of construction materials.
General aspects of Structural Design.
2 Hydraulics/Water Resources Engineering: 2
Flow in Pipes/Channel, Reservoirs/Dam, Application of Water Resources Engineering.
3 Geotechnical Engineering: 2
Scope and Importance of Geotechnical Engineering, field/practical illustration for civil
engineering applications e.g. subgrade, embankment, foundations, dams, canals, tunnels,
landslide problem etc.
4 Transportation Engineering: 3
Opportunities and challenges in Transportation Infrastructure, Construction Materials, Design
objectives, Highways, Rail Network, Airports, Monorails, sustainability.
5 Environmental Engineering: 2
Elements of water and wastewater Engineering, Air Pollution & Solid Waste Management
technologies.
6 Geomatics Engineering: 2
Importance of surveying in civil engineering projects, introduction of conventional techniques,
advancement in surveying techniques (GIS/RS/ Photogrammetry/Drone)

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course the student shall be able to
1. Make choice of career decisions
2. Apply concepts of ethics in professional practice

Suggested Books:
S. Name of Books / Authors/ Publishers Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1. Penn M. R. and Parker P. J. "Introduction to Infrastructure: An Introduction to Civil 2011
and Environmental Engineering" John Wiley & Sons
2. Arora, M.K. and Badjatiya, R.C. “Geomatics Engg”, Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee 2009

3. Mckay W. B. “ Building Construction” Orient Longman 2003

4. Schodek D. L. “Structures” Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 2002
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Computer Science and Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1
L T P : 1 0 0
Total No. of Lectures – 14
Course Objectives:
The students should know about various disciplines in Computer Science and Engineering and are aware of
emerging trends of Computer Science and Engineering.

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
1 COMPUTER HARDWARE 2
Basics of Number System, Evolution of Computer Hardware, Moore’s Law.
2 LOGIC DEVELOPMENT AND ALGORITHMS 2
Various techniques to solve a problem, Ways to specify an algorithm.
3 VARIOUS DISCIPLINES OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING 6
Basics of Operating Systems, Artificial Intelligence, Computer Networks, Information
Security, Software Engineering, Computer Vision.
4 Current and future trends and challenges in various fields of computing. Social, ethical 4
and economic issues related to computing technology. Exploration of career and
professional development opportunities.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, students will have:

1 Students get knowledge about various fields of Computer Science and Engineering.

Suggested books Year of Publication/

Reprint
1 Computing Fundamentals, Peter Nortan, 4th Ed., Tata McRaw Hill Latest edition
2 Computer Science Handbook, Allen B. Tucker, CRC Press Latest edition
 Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Electrical Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1
LTP : 1-0-0

Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to acquire basic knowledge of fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
along with energy resources, generation, transmission, distribution and utilization of electrical energy.

Total No. of Lectures - 14

Lecture wise breakup Number of
Lectures
1 OVERVIEW OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 1
General Introduction to the Field of Electrical Engineering and its Sub- disciplines,
2 ENERGY RESOURCES 1
Conventional and Non-conventional Energy Resources; Availability of Resources; Principle of
Energy Conversion and its Utilization; National and International Energy Trends; Global
Warming and Greenhouse Effects.
3 GENERATION 2
Generation of Electrical Power, Synchronous Generator; Generated Voltage Waveform,
Voltage and Frequency Level.
4 TRANSMISSION 1
Purpose of Transmitting Power, AC Transmission Voltage Levels; Transmission Lines,
Transmission Substation; HVDC Transmission.
5 DISTRIBUTION 2
Distribution Network and Substation; Single Line Diagram of Distribution Network; Overhead
Lines and Underground Cables; Grounding and Earthing.
6 ELECTRICAL MACHINES 2
Static and Rotating Machines, Classification, Working Principle and Applications.
7 UTILIZATION 1
Types of Load- Heating, Motor, Traction, Lighting and Fans; Load Characteristics; Consumer
Loads; Power Electronic Equipment.
8 METERING 2
Active and Reactive Power, Apparent Power, Voltage, Current, Power and Energy
Measurement.
9 ELECTRICAL WIRING CONCEPTS 1
Residential Wiring Diagram, Symbols of Switches, Fuse, Rheostat, SPDT, DPDT, Contacts,
Contactors, MCB, Safety and Protection.
10 POWER QUALITY AND CONTROL 1
Nature of Non- linear Loads; Problems due to Non-sinusoidal Current; Use of Electronics,
Microprocessor and Control Systems.

Course Outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and become familiar with the field of Electrical
Engineering and its various sub-disciplines.

Suggested Books:
Sr. No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
Publication/
Reprint

1 Basic Electrical Engineering by D. P. Kothari, I.J Nagrath, McGraw Hill 2009

2 Beaty H.W., Fink D.G., “Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers”, McGraw Hill 15th 2007
Edition
3 Singh, S.N., “Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution”, Prentice Hall of 2010
India, 2nd Edition,
4 Mullin Ray C., “Electrical Wiring Residential”, Delmar Publishers Inc., 11th edition, 1993
5 Electrical Engineering Fundamentals by Vincent Del Toro, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2003
6 Das Kamalesh, “Electrical Power Systems for Industrial Plants”, JAICO Publishing House, 2011
7 Jelley N., Andrews John, “ Energy Sciences – Principles, Technologies, and Impacts”, 2011
Oxford University Press,
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Electronics & Communication Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1
LTP : 1-0-0

Course Objective:
To familiarize the students with the evolution and basics of electronics and communication engineering. To
introduce the various fields of electronics and communication engineering and their applications.

Total Number of Lecture:14

Syllabus Number of
Lecture
Introduction to Semiconductor Devices, Analog/Digital Electronics, Embedded
Systems, VLSI design, Communication Systems (Analog and Digital), Microwave
1 Engineering and Antennas, Wireless Communication, Optical Communication, 14
Satellite Communication, and applications.

Course Outcomes: By the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Describe the evolution of electronics and communication engineering.
2. Explain the various fields of electronics and communication engineering.
3. List the diverse applications of electronics and communication.

SuggestedBooks:

Yearof
Sr. No.
Name of Book/Authors/Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Electronics Devices & Circuit Theory, RL Boylestead& L Nashelsky (PHI) 2009
2 Digital principles & applications, Malvino Leach, TMH 2011
3 Electronic Communication Systems, R.Blake, Cengage Learning 2002
4 Embedded Systems, Raj Kamal, TMH.
5 Microwave devices and Radar Engineering (3rd Edition) by Kulkarni, Umesh 2003
publications
6 Electronic Communication Systems by G. Kennedy And B. Davis, Mc Graw Hill, 4th 2006
Edition
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Mechanical Engineering

Course Code : OR1101
Credits : 1
L T P : 1-0-0

Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize student with the basics of Mechanical Engineering.
2 To introduce basic machine elements.
3 To familiarize with basic manufacturing processes.
4 To familiarize with the sources of energy and power generation.
5 To familiarize with the thermal systems like heat engines, refrigeration and air conditionings.

Lecture wise break up No. of

Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: History, Role, and Scope of Mechanical Engineer. (1)
2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS :Materials classification, Ferrous/non (1)
ferrous, Alloys e.g. Brass, mechanical properties, stress-strain curves
3 MACHINE ELEMENTS: Classification and types of Springs, Shaft, Bearing, Flywheel, (1)
Gears and their applications.
4 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS: Limits, Fits,, Tolerances, Gauges:their (1)
classifications and applications.
5 BASICS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESSES: Machine Tools e.g. Lathe machine, (2)
work/tool holding devices vice, chuck, Classification and applications of machining,
Welding, Casting, and Forming.
6 BASICS OF POWER PLANT ENGINEERING: Thermal /Nuclear/ Hydraulics their main (2)
Parts with schematic diagram. Power generation in India
7 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES : Solar Energy and its application in deferent fields (2)
,Wind, Bio Mass, Geothermal and Ocean energy
8 REFRIGERATION & AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: Working Of Window ,Split (1)
Air Conditioning Systems, Working Of Domestic Refrigerators
9 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES: Basics of two strokes, four strokes, Petrol & (2)
Diesel Engines. Their salient features, differences between two.
10 LATEST DEVELOPMENTS IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING: Micro-fluidics, (1)
Electric vehicle, Hydrogen energy
Text Book:
1 An Introduction to Mechanical Engineering by Jonathan Wickert and Kemper Lewis, 3 rd edition,
Cengage Learning
Reference Books:
1 Materials and Processes in Manufacturing and Management-a new perspective, Mc Graw Hil,Inc.1994.
2 Power Plant Engineering by P. K. Nag. Pub: Tata Mc Graw Hill
3 Applied Thermodynamics by R. Yadav
Course Outcomes:
1 Student will be able to clear the basic concept of Mechanical Engineering.
2 Student will be able to realize the importance of thermal systems and manufacturing.
3 Student will be able to come up with the innovative conceptual idea about sources of energy.
4 Student will get at glance knowledge regarding overall aspects and trends in mechanical engineering.
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Metallurgical & Materials Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1
LTP : 1-0-0

Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, student will be able to:
1. Understand and classify the sub branches and domains of Materials & Metallurgical Engineering stream.
2. The possible opportunities in the domains of Materials & Metallurgical Engineering.
3. Understand all basic principles involved in the theory of Elasticity and Plasticity.
Total No. of Lectures– 14
Lecture wise breakup Number of
Lectures
History and Evolution
1 Definition, concept, scope and nature of materials and metallurgy industries associated to 2
metallurgical engineering and allied fields, opportunities in metallurgical and materials engineering
Basics of Material Development
2 Principles of production of ferrous and non-ferrous metals; overview of alloy making and 3
Units involved in such process.
Overview of Materials Processing Technologies
3 Principle and overview of heat treatment industry, metal casting units, material joining technology etc. 3

Basics of Materials Selection

4 Basics and principles involved in material selection for special applications like high temperature 3
exposure, nuclear reactor materials ;corrosion resistant materials etc
Special and New Materials
5 Introduction to newer materials such as smart materials, biomaterials and their applications. 3

Course Outcomes:
Student will be able to:
1. The student will be able to understand and create the areas and domains in Metallurgical & Materials
Engineering on the basis of his/her interest and opportunity available in present industrial scenario.
2. The student will be able to understand the basic principles of selection of materials and challenges to
entrepreneurs in metallurgy

Suggested Books

Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of

No. Publication/
Reprint
1. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy/ S.H.Avner/ McGrawHill/ 2017

2 Materials Science and Engineering/ V.Raghavan/ PrenticeHall,NewDelhi 2015

3 Fundamentals of Materials Science and Engineering/WDCallisterJr./ JohnWileyandsons/ 2014

9thEdition.
4. Principle of Blas Furnace (Iron making)/ AK Biswas/ Cootha 2003
Orientation Course (OR1101) of 2 credits includes Introduction to Discipline Engineering of 1 credit – 14 hours

Course Name : Introduction to Production and Industrial Engineering

Course Code :
Credits : 1-0-0

Total no. of lectures: 14

Course Objectives:
To acquaint the students with evolution, scope and basics of Production and Industrial Engineering

Syllabus Hrs
(1) HISTORY AND EVOLUTION: Definition, concept and scope of Production and Industrial 2
Engineering, evolution of Production and Industrial Engineering.
(2) Concept of: Digital and Smart Manufacturing, Industrial Internet of things and basic 2
concepts of Industry 4.0
(3) Concept of manufacturing systems, design of manufacturing systems, operations and 2
management of manufacturing systems.
(4) INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION ENGINEERING: Principles of good product design, 2
tolerances and product life cycle, Machining, Metal casting, Metal forming, Joining and
welding processes
(5) INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING: Product economy and production 2
system, Concept of quality and cost, Logistics, Production planning and inventory control,
Operations research, Quality control.
(6) INTELLECTUALPROPERTY RIGHTS: Concept, scope and challenges 2

(7) FUTURE TRENDS IN PRODUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING: New 2

developments, Applications and Case studies.

Course Outcomes:
Students will be able to relate the evolution of Production & Industrial Engineering to societal and
1
other needs.
Students will be able to identify the basic processes and applications of Production & Industrial
2 Engineering.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
S. No. Title, Author, Edition and Publisher Year /
Reprint
(1) Manufacturing Engineering & Technology, Kalpakjian and Shmid (Pearson Publications), 7 th Edition 2013

(2) Materials and Processes In Manufacturing, DeGarmo, , John Wiley & Sons 2011

(3) W.C. Introduction to Industrial and Systems Engineering, Turner, Prentice Hall, 1992

(4) Introduction to Basic Manufacturing, CS Jawalkar, Narosa Publishers 2016

 Course Name : Calculus and Ordinary Differential Equations

Course Code : MA1101 (Common to all branches)

Credits : 4

L T P : 3-1-0

Total No. of Lectures : 42

Course Objectives:
At the end of the semester, the students should be able to

1 understand the behavior of infinite series and their use.

2 learn the concepts related to differential calculus of functions of several variables and their applications.

3 learn the concept and methods of evaluating multiple integrals and their applications to various problems.

4 learn the methods to solve ordinary differential equations of various types.

No. of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures

1 INFINITE SERIES 8
Infinite series and convergence, alternating series, power series and convergence. Taylor’s and
Maclaurin’s Series. (Scope as in Chapter 8, Sections 8.1, 8.3 – 8.9 of Text Book1).

2 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Limit, Continuity and Partial Derivatives; Euler’s Theoem for Homogeneous functions; Differentiability,
Linearization and Differentials; Chain rule; Extreme values and Saddle Points; Lagrange multipliers;
Taylor’s Formula. (Scope as in Chapter 12, Sections 12.1 – 12.6, 12.8 – 12.10 of Text Book 1).

3 INTEGRAL CALCULUS 10
Cylinders and Quadric surfaces, Double integrals in Rectangular and Polar form, Triple integrals in
Rectangular, Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates, Substitutions in Multiple integrals. Applications to
practical problems.
(Scope as in Chapter10, Sections10.6 and 10.7 and Chapter 13, Sections 13.1, 13.3, 13.4,13.6 and 13.7 of
Text Book 1).

4 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

First order exact differential equations, Integrating factor, Orthogonal trajectories, Second and Higher order
Linear Differential Equations with constant coefficients, Differential Operators, Methods of Variation of
Parameters and Undetermined Coefficients, Euler Cauchy Equation, Wronskian. (Scope as in Chapter 1,
Section 1.5, 1.8 Chapter 2, 2.1-2.4, 2.6, 2.9-2.10, 2.13- 2.15 of Text Book 2).

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the semester, the students are able to

1 test the behavior of infinite series.

2 Apply the concepts of differential calculus of functions of several variables.

3 evaluate multiple integrals and apply them to practical problems.

4 solve ordinary differential equations of various types

Text Books:

1 Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Thomas and Finney, 9th edition, Pearson Education Asia. 2006

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Kreyszig, 8th edition, John Wiley and Sons. 2005

Reference Books:

1 Differential Equations, Frank Ayers, SI edition, Mc Graw Hill. 1972

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barrett, 6th edition, Mc Graw Hill. 2003
 Course Name : Linear Algebra, Vector Calculus and Partial Differential Equations

Course Code : MA1201 (For Aero, ECE, Mech and student-specific for Civil)

Credits : 4

L T P : 3-1-0

Total No. of Lectures : 42

Course Objectives:
At the end of the semester, the students should be able to

1 learn the various concepts associated with real vector spaces and theory of matrices

2 learn the various concepts of vector calculus and their applications to problems.

3 formulate and solve linear and nonlinear partial differential equations and apply to engineering problems.

No. of
S.No Lecture wise breakup
Lectures

1 ALGEBRA 16
Vector spaces over reals, Linear dependence, Basis, Dimension, Co-ordinates with respect to a
basis, Change of basis, Subspace, Linear transformation Rn →Rm, Range space and Rank, Null
space and Nullity, Rank and Nullity relation, Matrix representation of a linear transformation,
Similar matrices, Invertible linear transformation, Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Cayley Hamilton
theorem, Diagonalization of a matrix.

2 VECTOR CALCULUS 14
Gradient, Divergence and Curl – their physical interpretation, Line, Surface and Volume integrals,
Green’s theorem in the plane, Stoke’s theorem, Divergence theorem, Applications to Science and
Engineering.

3 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation and solution of first order partial differential equations, Linear equations of higher order
with constant coefficients, Applications to Engineering problems.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the semester, the students are able to

1 solve the various problems related to real vector spaces and theory of matrices

apply various concepts of vector calculus to problems.

2

3 formulate and solve linear and nonlinear partial differential equations and apply to engineering problems.

Text Books:

1 Introductory Linear Algebra with Applications, Kolman, B. and Hill,D.R.,7th editiom, Pearson 2001
Education

2 E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Eighth Edition, John Wiley. 2005

Reference Books:

1 Elements of Partial differential equations, Sneddon, Mc Graw Hill. 1957

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barrett, 6th edition, Mc Graw Hill. 2003
 Course Name : Probability and Statistics

Course Code : MA1301 (For CSE, Electrical, Metta, Prod and student-specific for Civil)

Credits : 4

L T P : 3-1-0

Total No. of Lectures : 42

Course Objectives:
At the end of the semester, the students should be able to

1 understand the concepts of random variable and probability distribution.

2 learn the concepts of some theoretical probability distributions .

3 understand the concept of sampling distribution and be able to construct and interpret confidence interval
estimates for the mean , proportion , difference of mean and proportion

4 learn to use various tests of hypotheses

No. of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures

1 RANDOM VARIABLES 10
Random variables, Discrete, Continuous and Joint Probability distributions, Marginal and
Conditional distributions, Independent random variables, Expectation, Variance and Covariance,
Means and variances of linear combinations of random variables, Chebyshev’s inequality

2 PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS 10
Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions, Normal and Poisson approximations to
Binomial, Moments, Moment generating function.

3 SAMPLING DISTRIBUTIONS 7
Population, Sample, Sampling distributions, Central limit theorem, Distribution of sample mean,
Difference of means, Proportions and difference of proportions, Chi-square distribution, Student’s t-
distribution.

4 ESTIMATION 6
Estimation of parameters, Point estimate, Confidence interval for mean, difference of means and
proportions.

5 TESTS OF HYPOTHESES 9
Hypothesis, Test statistic, Critical region, Significance level, Single Sample and Two Samples Tests
for mean and proportion.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the semester, the students are able to

1 understand the concepts of random variable and probability distribution.

2 apply the concepts of some theoretical probability distributions .

3 use the concept of sampling distribution and apply tests of significance to practical problems of engineering
 4 apply various tests of hypotheses

Text Books:

1 Probability and statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Walpole, Myers, Myers and Ye, 7th 2006
edition, Pearson Education

Reference Books:

1 Miller and Freund’s: Prabability and Statistics for Engineers, Richard A. Johnson, C.B. Gupta, 2006
Pearson Education.

2 John E. Freund’s: Mathematical statistics with Application, Miller and Miller, Pearson Education. 2004
Course Name : Mechanics and Optics
Course Code : PY1101 (For Mechanical, Production, Civil and Aero)
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1. To inculcate the application of mechanics concepts in engineering.
2. To familiarize students with statics, kinematics and kinetics of rigid body.
3. To familiarize the students withlasers,optical fibers, ultrasonics and their applications.
4. To make the students able to understand the basic concepts ofnanotechnology and its applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup Number of

Lectures
1 STATICS: Free body diagrams, analysis of system of forces, Equation of equilibrium in 6
space and its applications, Center of gravity, Centroid, mass, area and Polar moment of inertia
of simple and compound bodies
2 DYNAMICS: Kinematics of a Particle, Introduction, Motion of a projectile. 4
Kinetics of a particle: Force and acceleration, Work and energy, Impulse and momentum.

PLANAR KINEMATICS OF A RIGID BODY: Rigid-Body motion,Translation,

3 Rotation about a fixed axis, Absolutegeneral P l a n e Motion analysis. 4
Relative-MotionAnalysis: Velocity, Instantaneous center of zero velocity, Acceleration,
Relative-Motion analysis using Rotating axes.
PLANAR KINETICS OF A RIGID BODY: Momentof Inertia. Planar Kinetic equations
ofmotion. Equations of motion: Translation, Rotation about a fixed axisand General Plane
4 motion. Kinetic Energy, Work of a Force, Work of a Couple, Principle of Work and Energy, 12
Conservation of Energy, Linear and Angular Momentum, Principle of Impulse and
Momentum, Conservation of Momentum, Eccentric Impact.
LASERS, OPTICAL FIBRES ANDULTRASONICS:
Basics of Interference, Diffraction and Polarization, Laser and its characteristics, He-Ne laser,
5 ruby laser, semiconductor lasers, Applications of Lasers, Optical fibres; Numerical aperture, 12
Classification of optical fibres, fibre Losses, fibre manufacturing, Applications of optical
fibres. Production of ultrasonics, detection and uses of ultrasonic, reverberation.
NANOTECHNOLOGY:
Introduction, Length Scale, Size dependence, Synthesis of Nanoparticles: Mechanical 4
6 Method,Sol-gel Technique, Physical Vapour Deposition, Chemical Vapour Deposition,
Applications of Nanotechnology

List of Experiments No.of

Turns
1 Familiarization of students with basic instruments Vernier Calipers, Screw Gauge and Spectrometer. 1
2 To find the wavelength of sodium light using Fresnel’s biprism. 1
(i) To determine the wavelength of He-Ne laser using transmissiongrating. 1
3
(ii) To determine the slit width using the diffraction pattern.
4 To determine the wave length of sodium light by Newton’s rings method. 1
5 To determine the wave length of sodium light using a diffraction grating. 1
6 To find the specific rotation of sugar solution using a Bi-quartz Polarimeter.
7 (i)To determine the angle of acceptance and numerical aperture of given fibre optical cable. 1
(ii) To determine the losses in optical fibre in dB due to micro bending of fibre.
8 To determine the Moment of Inertia of a Flywheel. 1
9 To determine the range of projectile as a function of angle of inclination and initial velocity. 1
10 To determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a given liquid. 1
11 To determine the restoring force per unit extension of a spiral spring by a statistical and dynamic 1
method and also to determine the mass of the spring.
12 To measure the centripetal force, Fc, and compare to Fc = mv2/r = mω2r. 1
13 To study conservation of energy and momentum in collision. 1
Course Outcomes: By the end of the course
1 Students will be able to understand and applythe concepts of mechanics, types of motions and characteristics
of a rigid body.
Students will develop capability to tackle the numerical problems in general and in the various areas covered
2
in the course.
Students will learn about lasers and fibre optics, which have important applications for societal needs.
3

Suggested Books:
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher/Edition
No.

1 Engineering Mechanics, Statics and Dynamics, R.C. Hibbeler, Pearson (12th Edition).
2 Dynamics, Merriam and Kraige, Wiley and Sons (5th Edition).
3 Dynamics F.P. Beer et al., McGraw Hill (8th Edition).
4 Optics, Ajoy Ghatak, McGraw-Hill (3rd Edition).
 Course Name : Electromagnetic Theory and Quantum Physics
Course Code : PY1201 (For CSE, ECE, Electrical)
Credits : 4
LTP : 302
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with the concepts of electrostatics and boundary value problems.
2. To make the students able to understand the magnetostatics and their boundary value problems.
3. To make the students able to understand and apply the concepts of electromagnetic wave propagation.
4. To familiarize the students with the concepts and principles of Quantum Mechanics.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup Number of

Lectures
VECTORS, FIELDS AND ELECTROSTATICS:
1 Cartesian coordinate System, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinate Systems, Gradient,
Divergence of a Vector and Divergence Theorem, Curl of a vector and Stoke’s theorem, 12
Gauss’s law & its applications, Maxwell’s 1st eqn. (Electrostatics), Electric Energy and
potential, Potential gradient, the dipole fields, Energy density in an electrostatic field. Current
and current density, Continuity of current, Metallic conductors, Dielectric materials,
Electrostatic boundary-value problems, Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations.
MAGNETOSTATICS:
Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s circuital law, Magnetic flux and magnetic flux density, Scalar and
vector magnetic potentials. Magnetic dipole, Force due to Magnetic field on a differential
2 current element, force between two differential current elements, Force and torque on a closed 10
circuit, magnetic materials, Magnetic boundary conditions, Inductors and inductances,

MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE PROPAGATION:

Faraday’s law, Displacement current, Maxwell’s equations in point form, Maxwell’s
equations in integral form, EM waves in general, EM wave propagation in Lossy Dielectrics,
3 Wave propagation in lossless dielectrics, Plane waves in free space, Plane waves in Good 10
conductors, Power & Poynting Vector, Reflection of a plane wave at normal incidence.
QUANTUM PHYSICS:
Need of Quantum theory, Photoelectric effect, The Compton effect; matter waves, group and
4 phase velocities; Uncertainty principle and its application; time independent and time 10
dependent Schrödinger wave equation; Eigen values and Eigen functions, Born’s
interpretation and normalization of wave function, applications of Schrödinger wave equation
for particle in one dimensional infinite potential well. Introduction to nanoscience

List of Experiments: Number of

Turns
1 Familiarization of students with basic instruments Vernier Calipers, Screw Gauge and 1
Spectrometer.
2 To study dielectric constant and Curie temperature of Ferroelectric ceramic BaTiO3. 1

3 To study the ratio of electron charge to mass ratio in uniform magnetic field. 1
4 To determine coercivity of magnetic material using hysteresis loop tracer. 1
5 To study the Hall effect and to determine Hall Voltage (VH) and Hall coefficient (RH) 1
6 To determine the energy band gap of semiconductor (Ge) using Four Probe Method. 1
7 To design a method to draw equipotential lines with various geometries of electrodes kept at 1
different potentials.
8 To study the variation of magnetic field with distance along the axis of current carrying circular 1
coil using Stewart and Gee’s apparatus.
9 To plot I-V Characteristics of Solar cell. 1
10 To determine magnetic susceptibility of paramagnetic sample using Quink’s tube method. 1
11 To determine the flashing and Quenching Potential of neon/Argon and also to find the capacitance 1
of unknown capacitor.
Course Outcomes:By the end of the course
1 Students will be equipped with the tools of electromagnetic theory.
Students will be able to solve numerical problems based on electrostatics, magnetostatics, electromagnetic
2
wave propagation.
Students will be able tounderstand and apply the basic concepts of Quantum Mechanics.
3

Suggested Books:
Yearof
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Engineering Electromagnetics, William H Hyat, Jr., and John A. Buck, Tata McGraw Hill 2013 / 5th
1 edition
Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, Matthew N.O. Sadiku, Oxford University Press 2012 / 4th
2 edition
Concepts of Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New 2013
3
Delhi.
Modern Physics, J. Bernstein, P.M. Fishbane and S.G. Gasiorowicz, Pearson, Education 2009
4
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
Course Name : Condensed Matter Physics
Course Code : PY1301 (For Metallurgical Engineering)
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To familiarize the students with basic concepts of the condensed phase of matter especially solids.
2 Tomake the students able to understand the crystal structure, lattice vibrations, electronic properties, dielectric
and the magnetic properties etc. in relation to engineering applications.
3 To familiarize students with the concept of Density Functional Theory.
4 To make the students able to understand the basics concepts of superconductivity, nanoscience and
theirapplications.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup Number of
Lectures
Basic concept of electrons and phonons: Space lattice, crystal structures (cubic and hexagonal (5)
1 cells). Lattice vibrations: Introduction of Phonons, Vibrations of one dimensional monoatomic and
diatomic lattices, Momentum of Phonons.
Basic of Free Electron Theory; Classical and Quantum Theory of free electrons,Fermi-Dirac
Distribution Function, Density of States, Motion in magnetic field (Hall effect), Electron in a (10)
2 Periodic Potential (Kronig Penney Model), Energy versus wave vector, Energy bands in solids.

Basic of electronic interactions, Dynamics and Responses: Electron dynamics in crystals,

3 Schrodinger Equation, Born Oppenheimer Approximation, HartreeFock Approximation, (7)
Hohenberg and Kohn formulation of DFT, Kohn Sham formulation of DFT, Applications of
Density Functional Theory.
Dielectrics and Magnetism: Fundamental of dielectrics, active and passive dielectrics, various
4 polarization mechanisms, Frequency and temperature dependence on polarization of dielectrics, (8)
Internal field, Dielectric Loss Tangent, Dielectric Breakdown. Fundamentals of Magnetism,
Classification of magnetic materials, ferromagnetic domains, hysteresis, antiferromagnetism.
Optical Phenomena and Superconductivity: Basic concept, Electronic transitions and optical
5 properties of metals and non-metals, Optical phenomena: luminescence, lasers, thermal
emission, photo-conductivity (only Definitions). Superconductivity: Introduction, Effect of (8)
Magnetic field, Effect of current, Type1 and Type II superconductors, Thermal properties,
Isotope effect, London Equations, Qualitative idea of BCS theory, Applications of
superconductivity.
Nanoscience: Introduction, Length Scale, Size dependence of properties: Surface energy, (4)
6
Electronic structure, Reactivity, Optical Properties, Melting Point, Nanoclusters, Nanocomposite,
Fullerenes, Carbon Nanotubes and Graphene.

S.No. List of Experiments Number of

Turns

1 Familiarization of basic instruments Vernier Calipers, Screw Gauge and Spectrometer. 1

2 To study dielectric constant and Curie temperature of Ferroelectric ceramic BaTiO3. 1

3 To study the ratio of electron charge to mass ratio in uniform magnetic field. 1

4 To determine coercivity of magnetic material using hysteresis loop tracer. 1

5 To study the Hall effect and to determine Hall Voltage (VH) and Hall coefficient (RH) 1

6 To determine the energy band gap of semiconductor (Ge) using Four Probe Method. 1

7 To study the variation of magnetic field with distance along the axis of current carrying circular 1
coil using Stewart and Gee’s apparatus.
 8 To Plot I-V Characteristics of Solar cell. 1

9 (i) To determine the wavelength of He-Ne laser using transmission grating. 1

(ii) To determine the slit width using the diffraction pattern.

10 To determine magnetic susceptibility of paramagnetic sample using Quink’s tube method. 1

11 To determine the flashing and Quenching Potential of neon/Argon and also to find the 1
capacitance of unknown capacitor.

Course Outcomes: By the end of the course

1 Students will be able to understand the physics behind structural properties of the solids.
2 Students will be able to develop their capability to tackle problems in general and in various areas covered in the
condensed matter physics.
3 Students will be aware of latest developments in certain areas of condensed matter physics, which have important
applications for societal needs.

Suggested Books:
Sr. No
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
Introduction to Solid State Physics, Charles Kittel, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (8 th Edition)
1
2 Solid State Physics, S.O. Pillai, New Age International, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (5 th Edition)
3 Solid State Physics, M. A. Wahab, Narosa Publishing House, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi (3 rd Edition).
4. Fundamentals of Condensed Matter Physics, Marvin L. Cohen and Steven G. Louie, Cambridge
University Press (June 2017).
5. Solid State Physics R.K. Puri, V.K. Babbar, S. Chand & Company, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi (3 rd Edition).
6. Density Functional Theory: A Practical Introduction, David S. Sholl Janice A. Steckel, John Wiley &Sons,
Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey.
 Course Name : Applied Chemistry I
Course Code : CH1101 (For Electrical, ECE and CSE)
Credits : 4
LTP : 3 -0-2

Total No. of Lecture-42

Objective: To teach the fundamentals and application of chemical sciences essential for the development of electrical and
electronic materials and technologies. Students will be learning various analytical techniques for the characterizations of
electronic organic/inorganic materials.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures = 42

Fundamentals for Applied Chemistry (10)

Molecular orbital theory, Jahn-Teller Effect in Crystal Field Theory, Solid state chemistry: Crystal
1 defects and line imperfections, Reaction mechanism in organic chemistry: Principles and methods of
determination, Chemical Kinetics: Langmuir–Hinselwood Mechanism, acid-base equilibria in non
aqueous media, Introduction to Computational chemistry and open source softwares
Polymeric Materials (6)
3 Mechanism and methods of polymerization, structure-activity relationship, Conducting Polymers:
types (n- or p- doping) and applications, Polymeric fibre materials
Energy Storage and Sensing Devices: Fundamentals of Electrochemistry, types of electrodes, (8)
4 Reference electrodes, Ion-selective electrodes, Fuel cells, Batteries (Lithium-ion Batteries and EV
Batteries), Renewable energy (Artificial photosynthesis), Solar cells, Sensors for IoT
(9)
Spectroscopic Methods for structural Analysis: Principle and applications (UV, IR, NMR, SEM
5
and TEM)

Chemistry of Electronic and Electrical Materials (9)

6 Semi-conductor and super conducting Materials, Carbon materials, Optical Materials (OLED), 2D
Materials, Magnetic materials.

Practicals
Sr. Name of Experiment
No.

1. Synthesis of metal-complex and determination of melting point

2. Implementation of IR technique for the analysis of metal-complex synthesized
3. Preparation of Metal-oxide by sol gel and hydrothermal method
4. Characterization of metal–oxide using SEM technique by structural determination
5 Synthesis of an organic compound and chemicals analysis.
6 Structural analysis of organic compound by NMR technique.
7 Synthesis of polymer material and its analysis.
8 Application of UV spectroscopy for polymer functional group analysis
9 Investigation of redox chemistry of an inorganic material by Cyclic Voltammeter.
10 Application of open source software for chemical analysis and drug design.

Outcomes: 1. To be able to apply the fundamentals of chemistry towards developing new Technologies based on new
materials.

2. To attain the essential analytical skills and designing of materials for electrical and electronic applications.

3. Application of softwares as important tools in technological applications.

 Books:

1. Concise Inorganic Chemistry, by J. D. Lee, 5th Edition, 2003 (Chapman & Hall).
2. Organic Chemistry by S. M. Mukherji, and S. P. Singh, 2017 (Newagepublishers).
3. Principles of Physical Chemistry by Puri, Sharma and Pathania, 2008 (W.H. Freeman & Co).
4. Atkin’s Physical Chemistry by Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, 7 th Edition (Oxford University Press).
5. Principle of Polymerization by G. Odian, 4th Edition, (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.).
6. D. S. Pavia, G.M. Lasmpman and G.S. Kriz: Introduction to Spectroscopy, 4 th Edition, (Thomson learning, Indian Edition).
7. Computational chemistry: Introduction to theory and applications of molecular and quantum mechanics: Lewars Errol G.
(Springer)
8. NPTEL web lectures: Chemistry of Materials, Engineering Chemistry I & III.
 Course Name : Applied Chemistry II
Course Code : CH1201 (For Mech., Prod., Metta, Aero. And Civil)
Credits : 4
LTP : 3 -0-2

Total No. of Lecture-42

Objective: To teach the fundamentals and application of chemical sciences essential for the development of engineering
materials and processing technologies. Students will be learning various analytical techniques for the characterizations of
composites and hybrid materials.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures = 42

Fundamentals for Applied Chemistry (8)

Molecular orbital theory, Jahn-Teller Effect in Crystal Field Theory, Solid state chemistry: Crystal
1 defects and line imperfections , Reaction mechanism in organic chemistry: Principles and methods
of determination, Chemical Kinetics: Langmuir –Hinselwood Mechanism, Acid -base equilibria in
non aqueous media
Polymer Chemistry (5)
2 Mechanism and methods of polymerization, Structure-Activity relationship, High performance
polymers and applications, Natural and synthetic fibres, biodegradable polymers
Fuels and Catalysis (5)
3 Petroleum processing, Solid and liquid Fuels for Propellents, Chemistry of combustion and
equations, Catalytic convertors
(7)
Electrochemistry and Corrosion: Introduction to Electrochemistry, Fuel cells, Batteries (Lithium-
4
ion Batteries and EV Batteries), Corrosion control and protective coatings
(10)
Spectroscopic Methods for strucutral analysis: Principle and Applications (UV, IR, NMR,
5
AAS/ICP-AES, SEM, TEM, XRD)

Chemistry of Metal based and Composite Materials (7)

6 Ceramic and Cement Materials, Metals and Alloys ,Phase change materials, Bio-inspired materials,
Composite materials, Smart materials

Practicals
Sr. Name of Experiment
No.

1. Synthesis of metal-complex and determination of melting point

2. Implementation of IR technique for the analysis of metal-complex synthesized
3. Preparation of Metal-oxide by sol gel and hydrothermal method
4. Characterization of metal–oxide using SEM technique by structural determination
5 Synthesis of an organic compound and chemicals analysis.
6 Structural analysis of organic compound by NMR technique.
7 Synthesis of polymer material and its analysis.
8 Application of UV spectroscopy for polymer functional group analysis
9 Investigation of redox chemistry of an inorganic material by Cyclic Voltammeter.
10 Application of open source software for chemical analysis and drug design.
Outcomes:
1. To be able to apply the fundamentals of chemistry towards emerging materials to benefit the societal needs.
2. To attain the essential analytical skills and designing of materials for various applications.
3. To be able to identify the chemical compositions required for designing of high performance materials.

Books:

1. Concise Inorganic Chemistry, by J. D. Lee, 5th Edition, 2003 (Chapman & Hall).
2. Organic Chemistry by S. M. Mukherji, and S. P. Singh, 2017 (Newagepublishers).
3. Principles of Physical Chemistry by Puri, Sharma and Pathania, 2008 (W.H. Freeman & Co).
4. Atkin’s Physical Chemistry by Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, 7th Edition (Oxford University Press).
5. Principle of Polymerization by G. Odian, 4th Edition, (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.).
6. D. S. Pavia, G.M. Lasmpman and G.S. Kriz: Introduction to Spectroscopy, 4 th Edition, (Thomson learning, Indian Edition).
7. NPTEL web lectures: Chemistry of Materials, Engineering Chemistry I & III.
 Course Name : Introduction to Environmental Sciences-I
Course Code : GS 1101 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 2
LTP : 200
Total No. of Lectures – 28

Course Objectives:
1. This course aims to acquaint students with the basics of Environmental Sciences.
2. To make them understand the importance of Environmental Sciences.
Lectures with breakup No. of Lectures

S. Unit wise breakup No. of

No. Lectures
1 Introduction to environmental studies: Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies; 4
Scope and importance; Concept of sustainability and sustainable development.
2 Ecosystems: What is an ecosystem? Structure and function of ecosystem; Energy flow in an 8
ecosystem: food chains, food webs and ecological succession. Case studies of the following
ecosystems :a)Forest ecosystem b) Grassland ecosystem c)Desert ecosystem d)Aquatic
ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries)
3 Natural Resources: Renewable and Non-Renewable Resources: Land resources and Landuse 8
change; Land degradation, soil erosion and desertification. Deforestation: Causes and impacts
due to mining, dam building on environment, forests, biodiversity and tribal populations.
Water: Use and over-‐exploitation of surface and ground water, floods, droughts, conflicts over
water (international & inter-‐state).Energy resources: Renewable and non-renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources, growing energy needs, case studies.
4 Environmental Pollution: Environmental pollution: types, causes, effects and controls; Air, 8
water, soil and noise pollution. Nuclear hazards and human health risks. Solid waste
management: Control measures of urban and industrial waste. Pollution case studies.

Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to relate the importance of Environmental Sciences for sustainable development of
society
2. Students will be able to understand the problems and remedies of Environmental Sciences

Text Books:

1 Environmental Science Ceonage Learning Publications, Miller G.T. and Spool Mar
2 Environmental Studies, Tata Mcgraw Hill Pub., Banny Joseph
3 Text book of Environmental Studies for U.G. Courses - University Press – ErachBharucna
4 Environmental Studies – from criteria to cure, Oxford Univ. Press, R. Raogopalan

SUGGESTED BOOKS:
S. No. Name of Book/Authors/Publishers Year of
Publications/R
eprints
1. “Building Construction Punmia B.C, Punmia Arun Jain & Ashok Jain, Laxmi 2012
Publication (P) Ltd.
2. “Estimation and costing in Civil Engineering’’, B.N Dutta, UBS publisher 2014
distributors.
3. “Engineering Materials”, S.C. Rangwala, Charotar Publishing House. 2016
4. “Building Construction”, P.C. Varghese, PHI learning Pvt Ltd. 2014
5. “Building Construction”, Mckay W. Barry, Pearson Publication. 2013
 Course Name : Introduction to Environmental Science-II (GSC-II)
Course Code : GS1201 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 2
LTP : 102

Total No. of Lectures: 14

Course Objectives: This course aims to attract the attention of students towards understanding the chemistry of pollutants, their
analysis and disposal along with introduction to green chemistry for Environment friendly processes and products.

Contents Lectures
1. Air Pollution: Introduction, Air pollutants, Photochemical reactions in the atmosphere,
3
Photochemical smog, Health effects and the usual ways to control air pollution
2. Water Pollution: Types of Pollution, Contaminants and their sources, measurements and its
3
control
3. Soil Pollution: Inorganic and organic contaminants, Pesticides and herbicides, health effects
3
and remedial measures, metal toxicology
4. Green chemistry for clean Technology: Goals, Principles and applications 2
5. E-waste Management: Introduction, Environmental impact/ health effects of e-waste
3
exposure, Methods to dispose e-waste

Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to identify the source of contaminants in Water, Soil and Air and develop the strategies to
minimize the levels of pollution
2. Students will understand the applications of green chemistry in mitigating the environmental pollution
3. Hands on training through lab experiments for chemical analysis of various pollutants.
Books:
1. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science, Fifth Edition by Sawyer, McCarty and Parkin (Publisher: McGraw-
Hill Education, 2003)
2. Environmental Chemistry, Seventh Edition by A.K. De ( Publisher: New Age International (P) Limited, 2017)
3. Environmental Chemistry: Pollution and Remedial Perspectives by A.V. Salker (Publisher: Alpha Science International
Limited, 2017)

Practicals
Sr. Name of Experiment
No.

1. Determination of total dissolved solid (TDS) by conductivity measurement

2. Measurement of acid-base equilibria by pH meter in water/soil sample.
3. Measurement of dissolved oxygen in given waste water sample
4. Determination of organic pollutants (pesticides) in water/soil sample by extraction and IR analysis
5 Measurement of alkalinity and hardness in a given sample of water
6 Measurement of biological oxygen demand (BOD) in given sample of water
7 Measurement of chemical oxygen demand (COD) in given sample of water
8 Measurement of oil and greases in waste water by gravimetric analysis
9 Detection of heavy metal by complexation and UV-Visible spectrophotometer
10 Removal of toxic metals by chemical adsorption method
Course Name : Introduction to Computing
Course Code : ES1101 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 4
LTP : 302

Course Objective:
To develop logical skills so that students should be able to solve basic programming problems.
To use programming knowledge to develop small projects including basic GUI design

Total No. of Lectures: 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING 3
Evolution of languages: Machine languages, Assembly languages, High-level languages.
Software requirements for programming: System softwares like operating system, compiler,
linker, loader; Application softwares like editor. Flowcharts. Algorithm, specification of
algorithm.
Industrial uses of programming in various domains
2 DATA TYPES and OPERATORS AND EXPRESSION 7
Storing integers, numbers with decimals, characters and strings, typecasting.
User input and output, use of command line arguments
Operators:arithmetic operators, relational operators, logical operators, bitwise operators,
miscellaneous operators. Expressions and their evaluation. Precedence and associativity rules.
3 ITERABLE CONTAINERS and STATEMENTS 7
List, set, tuple and dictionaries; range function; difference between various iterable containers
Decision making statements: if, if-else, nested if and if-else. Control statements: for & while
loops, nested loops; Role of statements like break, continue
4 FUNCTIONS and CLASSES 8
Advantage of modularizing program into functions, function definition and functioninvocation.
Function arguments: default, keyword and positional arguments.
Scope and lifetime of a variable. Recurrence relations and Recursion
Advantage of using classes, defining class data members & functions and accessing using objects.
Constructors and destructors in a class, parameterized constructors
5 GUI design 5
Introduction to tkinter library, use of TK &mainloop methods, use of widgets like Button,
Canvas, Checkbutton, Entry, Frame, MenuButton, Listbox, Menu, Scrollbar, Text, Message,
Pack, Grid, place etc. for GUI design
6 SORTING AND SEARCHING 9
Searching: Linear search, binary search and hash search.
Sorting: Insertion sort, selection sort, bubble sort, quick sort, merge sort, heap sort, and Bucket
sort.
Time and space complexity of algorithms, comparing algorithms
7 Problem Solving 3
Real-world programming problems
Total no. of turns: 14
List of Experiments:
1 Implement programs to input/output various data types
2 Implement programs to use command line arguments
3 Implement programs making use of various operators
4 Implement programs making use of conditional statements and loops
5 Implement programs making use of iterable containers
6 Implement programs making use of functions and recursion
7 Implement programs performing file operations
8 Implement various searching and sorting algorithms
9 Project work including GUI design using tkinter

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1 Develop understanding ofthe fundamental concepts essential for programming.
2 Make efficient use of iterables, function and classes to programming problems
3 Develop simple GUI applications
4 Learn to compare algorithms and improve efficiency of algorithms

Suggested Books:
Sr. No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of Publication/
Reprint
1 Think Python, How to Think Like a Computer Scientist, Version 2.0.17 2012
Allen Downey Green Tea Press Needham, Massachusetts
2 Python Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science 2015
by John M. Zelle, Franklin, Beedle& Associates Inc
3 Core python programming, Dr. R. Nageswara Rao, 2nd edition, Dreamtech 2018
press
 Course Name Engineering Drawing with CAD Software
Course Code ES1201 (Common to all branches)
Credits 3
L TP 2-0-2
Total No. Lectures 28

Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing. The
student should be able to visualize and draw the two- and three-dimensional objects. The student should also be able
to understand the features associated with operations of the computer-aided design (CAD) software.

Total No. of Lectures – 28

Number of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures
Introduction to Engineering Graphics, Concept of points and lines, System of Projections,
1 4
Orthographic projections, Dimensioning.

Introduction to different types of CAD Softwares e.g. SolidWorks/AutoCAD/ CATIA etc.,

2 2D-Sketching, Sketching Entities & Relation, 3D-Sketching, Editing and its Features, 7
Dimensions, Sketch Tools, File handling

Projections of planes / lamina on reference planes, classification of primary and secondary

3 5
planes, use of auxiliary planes, Exercises using CAD software

Classification of solids, Projections of solids on the basis of positions of the axis of various
4 6
solids on reference planes and Sectioning of solids, Exercises using CAD software

Introduction to Perspective projection, isometric views, Isometric lines & Axes, conversion
5 6
of orthographic views to isometric views and vice-versa, Exercises using CAD software

Number of
List of Experiments:
Turns
Exercises to be done using CAD software
1 2D & 3D Sketching using various sketching tools. 2
2 Projection of planes. 2
3 Developments of 3D-parts. 2
4 Projection of solids. 2
5 Projection of Sectioning of solids. 2
6 Isometric and orthographic views. 2
7 Generating drawings of 3D-parts. 2

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the students will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Graphics, drawing standards, L2
conventions and symbols that are in common usage.
2 Apply the concepts of engineering drawing to create orthographic projections of L3 & L6
points, lines, planes, solids with conventional and CAD software.
3 Visualize the actual objects and convert them in to readable drawings with L6
conventional and CAD software.
4 Create new designs/engineering models with conventional and CAD software. L6

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
 CO1 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - 1 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of Publication/
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Reprint

1 Engineering Drawing, P. S. Gill, S.K. Kataria& Sons. 2012

2 Engineering Drawing, D.A. Jolhe, Tata McGraw Hill 2010

3 Engineering Graphics with SOLIDWORKS, David C. Plan chard, SDC Publications 2020
Course Name : Introduction to Mechatronics
Course Code : ES 1301 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-0-2
Course Objectives:
The objective of the course content is to:
CO1: Impart knowledge and information about product design.
CO2: Development and control of intelligent systems for all aspects of life.

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
Understanding Mechatronics
Mechatronics System, Evolution, Definitions of Mechatronics, Key Elements of Mechatronics,
1 Mechatronics for all Civil, Metallurgical, Aerospace, Chemical, Architecture, Medical, Robotics, 02
Defense, Agriculture, etc., Role of Mechanical, Electrical, Electronics, Computer Engineers in
Intelligent Product and Process Design, Development and Control, Bio-mechatronics.
Systems and Machines :
System, Classification of System, Mechanistic System Classification Based on Input Energy,
2 02
Mathematical Model and Function, Machine, Parts of Machine, Concepts of Machine,
Classification of Machines based on Function and Size.
System Intelligence:
Properties of Intelligent System, System Intelligence Levels, Human Intelligence System, Future 02
Generation System Intelligence Level, Expressing System Intelligence.
Sensor and Transducer :
Sensors in Mechatronics System, Difference between Sensors and Transducers, Classification of
3 Sensors, Based on Sensor Output Signal, Sensor Input Physical Parameters, Sensor Accuracy 03
(Smart/Intelligent Sensor), Performance Terminology, Static Characteristics, Dynamic
Characteristics.
Signal Conditioning Devices :
Signal Conditioning Processes,Application of Signal Conditioning Devices in Mechatronics
4 based on Their Characteristics such as Diode, Transistor, SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, Op-Amps, Signal 05
Filtering, Circuit Protection, Signal Conversion, ADC and DAC, Logic Gates, Flip-Flops,
Register, Counters.
Actuators:
Actuators, Types of Actuators, Mechanical Actuation System (i.e. Linear-rotary, Rotary-linear
5 05
Mechanism, Gear, Bearing, Pulleyetc.). Electrical Actuation System (DC, AC, Stepper Motors),
Pneumatic and Hydraulic Actuation System.
Controllers :
6 Microprocessor, Microcontroller, PLC Controller& Their Architectures, Principles and Working 05
Software Programs (Assembly/High Level),Interfacing Aspects, Application Examples.
Robotics and Automation:
7 Evolution of Robots, Definitions, Types of Motions, Function, Governing Laws, Classification, 04
Features and Components of Robots, System Automation .
Total No. of Lectures 28

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Number of Turns
1 Experiment on Sensors & Transducers (Mechatronics Lab)
To study the characteristics of LVDT using linear displacement trainer Kit & compare
(i) 01
with ideal characteristics.
To measure the strain of the metal strip using strain gauge trainer kit & compare with
(ii) 01
ideal characteristics.
To measure the angular displacement of resistive & capacitive transducer using
(iii) 01
angular displacement trainer kit & compare with ideal characteristics.
To obtain the characteristics of RTD, Thermistor, thermocouple with hot and cold
(iv) 01
junction thermal trainer kit & compare with ideal characteristics.
2. Experiments on Signal Conditioning.
(a) Experiments on Analog Devices
 (i) PN Junction Diode 01
(ii) Zener Diode 01
(iii) Half wave rectifier 01
(iv) Full wave rectifier 01
(b) Experiments on Digital devices
(i) Logic Gates (AND, OR, NAND, NOR etc) 01
(ii) Flip Flop (RS Flip Flop), D Flip Flop. 01
3 Experiments on Controller 01
(i) Study of microprocessors, microcontroller, programmable logic controller (PLC)
(ii) PLC interfacing of I/O and I/O addressing. 01
(iii) To perform any basic sequence programming using PLC. 01
4. Experiments on Actuators 01
(i) Study of mechanical, electrical, hydraulic/pneumatic actuators.

Course Outcomes:

By the end of this course, the student will be able:

CO1: To understand components of mechatronic system,
CO2: To design product and systems theoretically as well as practically with intelligence.

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of Publication/
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
No. Reprint
1 Mechatronics First edition by Tilak Thakur, published by Oxford University Press 2016
2 Mechatronics, Fourth edition, by W Bolton. ISBN 978-81-317-3253-3 2013
Dan Necsulescu Mechatronics published by Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt.
3 2001
Ltd., Indian Branch, 482 FIE, Patparganj, Delhi India.
Book by H M T Limited, Mechatronics Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
4 1988
Limited, New Delhi.
Mechatronics Principles, Concepts & Applications by Nitaigour P Mahalik
5 2003
published by TMH
 Course Name : Introduction To Electronics & Electrical Engineering
Course Code : ES1401 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 2
LTP : 2-0-0

Course Objective:
To introduce to the students, the fundamental concepts of electronic devices, circuits and electrical systems
for engineering applications.
Total Number of Lecture:28

Lecture wise breakup Number of

Lecture
1 Semiconductor Device sand applications: Familiarizations with active and passive
components Physics of p-n junction diode, BJT, JFET and MOSFET, diode as Rectifier, 7
clippers and clampers, Transistor as an amplifier, Introduction to Audio amplifiers,
Functional operation of OpAmp, concept of Oscillators, filters and their types
2 Digital Electronics: Introduction to logic gates, combinational circuits: adder, subtractor,
multiplexer, demultiplexer, sequential circuit: flipflops, counters, registers, Analog to 5
digital conversion, Digital to analog conversion and applications
3 Communication Systems: Various frequency bands used for communication, Block 3
diagram of Analog and Digital communication, need of modulation, Analog modulation
techniques (Amplitude and frequency), Digital modulation techniques (ASK, FSK, PSK,)
4 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering: Introduction to circuit laws, Network
theorems, Amplitude, Phase, Phase difference, RMS value and Average value of a AC 8
signal, Active and Reactive Power, single phase and 3 phase systems,star delta connection,
construction, working principle and speed control of AC and DC machines, Transformer:
construction, working principle and applications
5 Measurements: Principle of measurement, voltage, current, power and energy 5
measurement, analog and digital measurement system

Course Outcomes: By the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Express the understanding of semiconductor devices (p-n Diode, BJT, MOSFET etc), and their
applications.
2. Describe the functional operation of various analog and digital electronic circuits.
3. Solve basic electronic circuits using circuit laws and network theorems.
4. Describe the basic principle and working of fundamental electrical systems, ac dc motors and transformer
etc.
5. Explain the basic principle of measuring electrical quantity such as voltage, current, power and energy.
SuggestedBooks:
Year of
Sr. No NameofBook/Authors/Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Electronics Devices & Circuit Theory, RLBoylestead & LNashelsky(PHI) 2009
2 CircuitsandNetworks:AnalysisandSynthesis,SudhakarandShyamMohan,TMH 2009
3 ElectronicCommunicationSystemsbyG.Kennedy,McGrawHill,4thEdition 2008
4. Digital Principles And Applications, Seventh Edition, A. Malvino and D. Leach 2011

5. Alexander, Charles K., and Sadiku, Matthew N. O., Fundamentals of Electric 2013
Circuits, 5th Ed, McGraw Hill
6. A K.Sawhney-A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Latest Edition
Instrumentation
Course Name : Introduction to Manufacturing
Course Code : ES1501 (For Aero, CSE, ECE and Electrical)
Credits : 2
LTP : 2-0-0

Total no. of lectures: 28

Course Objectives:
To equip the students with basic understanding and learning of its concepts for conventional and advanced
manufacturing processes along-with their applications.

Syllabus Hrs
(1) Concept of Manufacturability, Classification of Manufacturing processes
-Introduction to Primary Manufacturing processes: Types and applications 6
-Introduction to Secondaryand Tertiary Manufacturing processes: Types and applications.

(2) Concept of Smart, Digital and Sustainable manufacturing processes with applications.
Concepts of Industry 4.0 its relevance and Industrial Internet of Things (IIOT). 6

(3) Introduction to Advanced Manufacturing practices: Classification, Principles and

Applications of Electric Discharge Machining (EDM), Laser Beam Machining (LBM), 6
Abrasive Flow Machining (AFM), Chemical and Electro Chemical Machining (ECM),
Ultrasonic Machining and Welding etc.

(4) Computer Integrated Manufacturing: Concept of CAD/ CAM.

a) Concept of Additive and Subtractive manufacturing processes: 6
Rapid Prototyping & Rapid Manufacturing, Principles, Major technologies used and its
applications.
b) CNC machines, concepts, uses and applications.
c) Industrial Robots, types and applications.
(5) Case studies and practical examples on: 4
a) Manufacturing of small precision parts.
b) Manufacturing of ICs & PCB.
c) Manufacturing of keyboards and hardware.

Course Outcomes:
1 Students would be able to classify and choose manufacturing processes for typical applications.
2 Understand the process, steps and applications of Rapid Prototyping

3 Understand the principles and applications of CNC and Robots in manufacturing.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
S. No. Title, author and Publisher Publication year /
Reprint
(1) Manufacturing Engineering & Technology, Kalpakjian and Shmid (Pearson 2013
Publications)
(2) Advanced Manufacturing Processes, VK Jain, Allied Publishers 2014
(3) Introduction to Basic Manufacturing, CS Jawalkar, Narosa Publishers 2016
Course Name Strength of Materials
Course Code ES1601 (For Civil, Mechanical, Metta and Production)
Credits 2
L T P 2-0-0
Total No. Lectures 28

Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the basic concept regarding the strength of
material. The course will prepare the students to apply these concepts to engineering and applied sciences
problems.

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
INTRODUCTION: 3
Equations of static equilibrium, Concept of various forces/loads, stresses and strains
developed due to these forces/loads, Uniaxial tensile test, Stress-strain diagrams for
1
various types of ferrous and non-ferrous materials, isotropic and anisotropic materials,
Compression test, impact test, fatigue test, hardness test, torsion and bending test as per
ASTM standards
SIMPLE STRESS & STRAIN: 5
Hooke’s law, stress and elongation produced in various types of bars due to its own
2 weight and applied axial force, Poisson’s ratio, relationship between elastic constants,
stresses and elongationproduced in simple & composite bars due to axial, thermal and
combined loading.
2-D STATE OF STRESS ANALYSIS: 5
Generalized 2-D state of stress accompanied by shear stress, stresses on an arbitrary
3 plane under this state of stress, sign conventions, complementary shear stress, principal
stresses and principal planes, Different stresses determination through Mohr’s stress
circle approach in 2-D state of stress.
SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT IN BEAMS: 5
Classification of beams, supports and loads, Shear force (SF) &Bending moment (BM)
in beams, sign conventions, Relation between rate of loading (w) with SFand BM. SF
4
and BM diagrams of cantilevers, simply sported beams with or without overhang under
different types of loading e.g. concentrate loads, uniformly distributed load, uniformly
varying load, moment or its combinations, the point of contra-flexure
BENDING & SHEAR STRESSES IN BEAMS: 5
Theory of pure bending, position of neutral axis, Bending equation, practical application
5 of bending equation, review of moment of area concepts, variationof bending stress in
various cross-sectional beams, shear stresses in beams, variation of shear stresses for
different cross-sectional beams
TORSION OF CIRCULAR SHAFTS: 5
Torsional equation of circular shafts, shear stress distribution, torsional rigidity, power
6
transmitted by the shaft, comparisons of hollow & solid circular shafts, analysis of
shafts in series and parallel mode

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concept of stresses & strains, various types of materials, its L2
properties & testing processes as per ASTM standards
2 Understand and evaluate simple and complex stresses for various machine L2 & L5
elements.
3 Evaluate various beams on the basis of shear force and bending moment under L5
different loading conditions.
4 Analyze beams due to shear and bending stresses. L4
5 Understand the torsional stresses in circular shaft and apply the concept for L2, L3 &L6
design of various shafts in power transmission.
 CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Strength of Material - G. H. Ryder (MacMillan) 1969
2 An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids – Crandall & Dahl (Mc-Graw Hill) 2012
3 Engg. Mechanics of Solids - E. P. Popav (Pearson Education) 2003
4 Strength of Material: D S Bedi, Fifth Ed. 2010
5 Strength of Material by R K Rajput, Fifth Ed. 2012
 Course Name : Communication Skills & Ethics
Course Code : HS1101 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 3
LTP : 2-0-2

Course Objectives :
1. Thecourseaimstoenhancecommunicationskillsandcriticalthinkingskillsofthestudentsto further develop their
personality so as to be more effective in personal and professional life.
2. The course further aims to provide basic knowledge in ethics, values, norms and standards
to establish their importance in life and to enable students to self-assess and enhance their personality.

Total No. of Lectures – 28

Lecture-wise Breakup No. of
Lectures
Introduction to Communication Process (1)
1
Scope, Significance, Types, Levels and Tools of Effective Communication. Verbal, Vocal and
Non-Verbal Skills
Critical Thinking Skills (4)
2
Developing Thinking Skills-Descriptive, Referential, Inferential, Discursive, Analytical,
Evaluative, Creative and Lateral Using Texts and Various Media Forms:(Books, Newspaper
Articles, Films, Social Visuals)
Speaking Skills (3)
3
Developing Speaking Skills PACESS-Governed (PACESS-Purpose, Audience, Content,
Expression, Structure, Style) for Communication at Various Levels: Interpersonal, Group,
Organization and Society
Advanced Technical Writing (4)
4
Job Application, E-mail, PACESS-Governed Short Essay, Memo, Notice, Agenda,
Minutes, IMRD-BasedReport.
Job Preparation (2)
5
Sensitization to Building Portfolio, Resume, Interview Skills
Introduction to Ethics (5)
6 Concept, Nature, Scope, Functions and Factors influencing Ethics, Psycho-Social Theories of
Moral Development – Kohlberg and Carol Gilligan, Broader Ethical Issues in Society (Research
Based)
Ethics and Business (3)
7
Concept and Objectives of Business Ethics, Factors influencing Business Ethics, 3 C’s of
Business Ethics, Ethical Dilemmas in Business ( Role- Play)
Self-Awareness & Self-Development (6)
Concept of Self Awareness, Self- Esteem, Self-Assessment – SWOT Analysis, Concept of
Self-Development, Social Intelligence, Emotional Intelligence,
8 Time and Stress Management, Positive Human Qualities (Empathy, Gratitude, Compassion,
Forgiveness and Motivation),
Personality Development Models – Johari Window, Myers Briggs Type Indicator Leadership
Development

Total No. of Practical Sessions: 14

Practical Session Wise Breakup No. of
Practical
Sessions
Organizational Communication (2)
1
Verbal, Vocal and Non-Verbal Communication at Various Levels, Self- Introduction, Speech,
JAM
Applying Critical Thinking Skills (4)
2
Reading Comprehension, Book Review, Film Review, Social Visuals
Interpretation and Critical Analysis .
Speaking Techniques at Different Forums (4)
3
Group Discussions, Making and Presenting Power Point Presentations
Practice on Technical Writing (3)
4
Job Application, Email, Memo, Notice, Agenda, Minutes, Report, Short Essay
5 Towards Job Preparation (1)
Sensitization to Building Portfolio, Resume, Interview

Course Outcomes:
1 The students will gain greater proficiency in English language and its technical aspects for its effective use in
personal and professional life.
2 Thestudentswillachievegreaterrefinementofpersonalitythroughawarenessandacquisition
of forms and techniques of communication skills.
3 The students will be able to distinguish between right and wrong in both personal and professional life.

Suggested Books& E-Material

Year of
S.No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
Publication/
Reprint
TechnicalCommunication: Principles and Practices, III 2017
1 Edition,Meenakshi Raman and Sangeeta Sharma, OUP, NewDelhi
(with E-Material)

English for Writing Research Papers, Adrian Wallwork, Springer, London, New 2011
2
York
3 Business Ethics – Text and Cases”, Murthy C.S.V., 1st Edition, Pubs: 2014
Himalaya Publishing House.
4 “Issues and Ethics in the Helping Professions”, Corey G., Corey M.S. and 2010
CallananP., 8th Edition, Pubs: Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning.

Reference Books and E-Materials

1 Business Communication III Edition, RK Madhukar, Vikas Publication House Pvt. Ltd, 2018
Noida
2 Body Language, Allan Pease, Sudha Publications Pvt Ltd., New Delhi 2004
3 Techniques of Writing Business Letter, Memos & Reports, Courtland L Bovee, Jaico 2005
Publishing House, Mumbai
4 Bridging the Soft Skills Gap, Bruce Tulgan, Wiley, New Delhi 2005
5 A Guide to Gracious Living Etiquette & Life Skills, Jyoti Singh, Mohindra Publishing 2017
House
6 TED Talks Videos on Ted.com (Not their Regional versions)
7 “The Curse of Self: Self-awareness, Egotism and the Quality of Human Life”, Leary 2007
M.R., 1st Edition, Pubs: Oxford University Press.
8 Business Ethics”, Hartman L.P. and Chatterjee A., 3 rd Edition, Pubs: Tata McGraw Hill. 2006

9 Positive Human Qualities (web) https://positivepsychology

.com/

10 Theory of Moral Development (web) https://www.verywellmin

d.com/kohlbergs-theory-
of-moral-development-
2795071
 1

List of Undergraduate Courses for Batch 2020-21 Onwards

No. Course Name Course Code Credits L-T-P
Departmental Core Courses
1. Elements of Manufacturing Processes (3rd Sem) ME1031 3 2-0-2
2. Elements of Thermodynamics (3rd Sem) ME1032 3 3-0-0
3. Mechanics of Materials (3rd Sem) ME1033 3 2-1/2-2/2
4. Theory of Machines (3rd Sem) ME1034 3 2-1/2-2/2
5. Manufacturing Processes (4th Sem) ME1041 3 2-0-2
6. Applied Thermodynamics (4th Sem) ME1042 3 2-1/2-2/2
7. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning (4th Sem) ME1043 3 2-1-0
8. Mechanical Vibrations (4th Sem) ME1044 3 2-1/2-2/2
9. Production Engineering (5th Sem) ME1051 3 2-1-0
10. Production and Operations Management (5th Sem) ME1052 3 3-0-0
11. Heat and Mass Transfer (5th Sem) ME1053 3 2-0-2
12. Design of Mechanical Systems (5th Sem) ME1054 3 3-0-0
Departmental Electives
1. This basket is for department students as their Department Elective Courses with 2000 series number.
2. This basket is also for department students for their Major Specialization in a specific field with 4000
series number.
3. For Major Specialization in Mechanical Engineering, student has to opt minimum three stream
specific department elective courses out of required four courses.
4. The courses with * shall also be offered as Honours and Open Elective Courses with 3000 and 6000
series respectively.
Department Electives for all Streams
1. Finite Element Method in Engineering ME2001/ME4001 4 3-0-2
2. Measurement and Metrology* (DEC & OE) ME2002/ 4 3-0-2
ME3001/ME4002/ME6001
3. Automotive Engineering* (DEC & OE) ME2003/ 4 3-0-2
ME3002/ME4003/ME6002
4. Optimization Techniques in Engineering* (DEC & ME2004/ 4 3-1-0
OE) ME3003/ME4004/ME6003
Design Stream
5. Mechanisms and Machines ME2005/ME4005 4 3-1-0
6. Vibration and Noise Control ME2006/ME4006 4 3-1-0
7. Computer Aided Design ME2007/ME4007 4 3-0-2
8. Fracture Mechanics and Fatigue ME2008/ME4008 4 3-1-0
9. Experimental Stress Analysis ME2009/ME4009 4 3-1/2-2/2
10. Mechanics of Composites Materials ME2010/ME4010 4 3-1-0
11. Vehicle Dynamics ME2011/ME4011 4 3-0-2
12. Kinematic and Dynamics of Robots ME2012/ME4012 4 3-0-2
13. Work Station Design and Neuro-Ergonomics ME2013/ME4013 4 3-1-0
Manufacturing Stream
14. Computer Aided Manufacturing ME2014/ME4014 4 3-0-2
15. Precision Engineering ME2015/ME4015 4 3-0-2
16. Advanced Manufacturing Techniques ME2016/ME4016 4 3-1-0
17. Production Planning and Control ME2017/ME4017 4 3-1-0
18. Surface Engineering ME2018/ME4018 4 3-0-2
19. Engineering Metallurgy ME2019/ME4019 4 3-0-2
20. Product Design and Development ME2020/ME4020 4 3-1-0
21. Composite Materials ME2021/ME4021 4 3-0-2
 2

Thermal Stream
22. Fluid Mechanics ME2022/ME4022 4 3-1/2-2/2
23. Internal Combustion Engines ME2023/ME4023 4 3-1-0
24. Computational Fluid Dynamics ME2024/ME4024 4 3-0-2
25. Hydraulic Machines ME2025/ME4025 4 3-1/2-2/2
26. Convective Heat and Mass Transfer ME2026/ME4026 4 3-1-0
27. Two Phase Flow Heat Transfer ME2027/ME4027 4 3-1-0
28. Automotive Combustion and Emissions ME2028/ME4028 4 3-1-0
29. Thermal System Modelling and Simulations ME2029/ME4029 4 3-1/2-2/2
30. Design of Thermal Systems ME2030/ME4030 4 3-1-0
31. Micro-Nano Scale Heat Transfer ME2031/ME4031 4 3-1-0
32. Power Plant Engineering* (DEC & OE) ME2032/ 4 3-1-0
ME3004/ME4032/ME6004
Open Electives
1. This basket list is for other department’s students as Open Elective Courses with 6000 series number.
2. This basket list is also for department students as their Department Elective Courses with 2000 series
number.
3. This basket list is also for department’s students as Honors Courses with 3000 series number.
1. Measurement and Metrology* ME2002/ 4 3-0-2
ME3001/ME4002/ME6001
2. Automotive Engineering* ME2003/ 4 3-0-2
ME3002/ME4003/ME6002
3. Optimization Techniques in Engineering* ME2004/ 4 3-1-0
ME3003/ME4004/ME6003
4. Power Plant Engineering* ME2032/ 4 3-1-0
ME3004/ME4032/ME6004
5. MEMS and Micro System Design ME2033/ME3005/ME6005 4 3-1-0
6. Principles of Product Design ME2034/ME3006/ME6006 4 3-1-0
7. System Dynamics and Control ME2035/ME3007/ME6007 4 3-1/2-2/2
8. Smart Materials and Structures ME2036/ME3008/ME6008 4 3-1-0
9. Tribology & Lubrication ME2037/ME3009/ME6009 4 3-1-0
10. Modeling and Simulation ME2038/ME3010/ME6010 4 3-1-0
11. Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control Design ME2039/ME3011/ME6011 4 3-1-0
12. Non-Conventional Energy Resources ME2040/ME3012/ME6012 4 3-1-0
13. Advanced Unconventional Energy Resources ME2041/ME3013/ME6013 4 3-1-0
14. Experimental Methods for Engineers ME2042/ME3014/ME6014 4 3-1/2-2/2
15. Thermal Management of Engineering Systems ME2043/ME3015/ME6015 4 3-1-0
16. Solar Thermal Energy ME2044/ME3016/ME6016 4 3-1-0
17. Numerical Analysis Techniques ME2045/ME3017/ME6017 4 3-1-0
18. Thermal Management of Buildings ME2046/ME3018/ME6018 4 3-0-2
19. Thermal Energy Storage Technologies ME2047/ME3019/ME6019 4 3-1-0
20. Industrial Engineering and Management ME2048/ME3020/ME6020 4 3-1-0
21. Reliability and Maintenance Engineering ME2049/ME3021/ME6021 4 3-1-0
22. Operation Research and Simulation Techniques ME2050/ME3022/ME6022 4 3-1-0
23. Total Quality Management ME2051/ME3023/ME6023 4 3-0-2
24. Micro and Nano Manufacturing ME2052/ME3024/ME6024 4 3-0-2
25. Industrial Automation ME2053/ME3025/ME6025 4 3-0-2
26. Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing ME2054/ME3026/ME6026 4 3-1-0
* These courses shall also be floated as department as well as open elective.
 3

Minor Specialization in Mechanical Engineering - Course Basket

(Student is required to opt minimum one course each from below mentioned groups)
S. No. Course Name Course Code Credit LTP
GROUP A
1 Manufacturing Technology-I ME5001 4 3-0-2
2 Manufacturing Technology-II ME5002 4 3-1-0
GROUP B
3 Fundamentals of Thermo-Fluidics ME5003 4 3-1/2-2/2
4 Fundamentals of Heat Transfer ME5004 4 3-0-2
GROUP C
5 Strength of Materials and Concepts of Design ME5005 4 3-1/2-2/2
6 Kinematics and Dynamics of Machines ME5006 4 3-1/2-2/2
 4

Departmental Core Courses

 5

Course Name : ELEMENTS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

Course Code : ME1031
Credits : 3
LTP : 2-0-2

Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with the basic tools and equipment’s used in manufacturing.
2. To introduce the practical knowledge on different aspects of manufacturing processes.
3. To familiarize with basic manufacturing processes, techniques, use of machine tool etc.
4. To familiarize with the production of basic raw materials and secondary processes like joining, forming,
and assembly.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
MANUFACTURING: Definition, Classification, Concept of product design and
1 development, Plant and shop layout, Manufacturing activities inside and outside the 4
factory, Industrial safety, Selection of raw materials, Storing, Process planning.
FOUNDRY: Raw materials: fuels, fluxes, refractory and related materials, patterns,
mould, core; Furnaces: Cupola, induction and resistance heating furnaces, core
furnace, open hearth furnace, pit furnace, Sand casting, Mechanics of solidifications;
Design: Gating system, runner and riser; Pouring time calculation, Degassing,
2 Fettling; Special Castings: Centrifugal, carbon dioxide, plaster, shell and permanent 8
moulding, precision casting, investment casting, die casting, Continuous
casting;Casting of composites: Casting Al/SiC, Al/ZrO2, Al/Al2O3 and hybrid
MMCs, properties and applications. Casting defects: Causes and their remedial
actions.
METAL FORMING: Classification, hot and cold working processes, Types:
coining, embossing, punching, blanking, rolling, forging, fullering, edging extrusion,
3 drawing, Special forming processes: rotary swaging, ring rolling, gear forming, 5
tandem rolling, thread rolling, bearing cup, spline shaft rolling, electro, hydraulic,
magneto-electro and hybrid forming; Forming defects: Causes and remedial actions.
WELDING: Definition, classification, mechanism of welding, weldability. Arc
welding: principle, types, Carbon, submerged, electro-slag, MIG, TIG and plasma
arc welding. Electrodes: Types, classification and codification, selection and
specific applications. Resistance welding: Principle, types, Spot-welding machines.
Solid state welding: Cold, diffusion, ultrasonic, explosive, friction and forge
4 7
welding. Thermochemical welding: Principle, types, applications. Gas welding:
Types, different zone and temperature of flames, applications. Oxy-flame cutting:
Principle, types, applications. Brazing and soldering: Principle, types, materials,
application in macro and micro domain, Welding defects: Causes and remedial
actions.
HEAT TREATMENT: Definition, classification, annealing, normalizing,
hardening and tempering; Iron-carbon and TTT diagram, Surface hardening
5 4
processes: carburizing, nitiriding, cyaniding and flame hardening, heat treatment
processes for non-ferrous metals.

List of Experiments:
1 Carpentry section: (i) half lap T & L-joint, (ii) pattern of hexagonal nut.
2 Fitting section: (i) leveling & surface marking, (ii) square hole making.
3 Foundry section: (i) mould making, (ii) casting hexagonal nut.
4 Smithy section: (i) round bar to cube, (ii) round bar to V-block.
 6

5 Welding section: (i) arc welding: V, L,T joints, (ii) spot welding on sheet metal.
6 Machine section: (i) turning & tapering, (ii) thread cutting.
7 Assembly and electrical basic connection: (i) study automobile engine, (ii) wiring & electrical
connection.
8 Sheet metal & Electroplating: (i) bending & joining, (ii) buffing and electroplating on sheet metal

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concept of manufacturing, product design, selection of raw L2
materials, storing and process planning.
2 Plan and apply the different manufacturing processes to fabricate the ferrous, L3
nonferrous and composite materials.
3 Analyse the possible defects of manufacturing processes and ability to rectify L4
the defects.
4 Ability to select and apply the suitable manufacturing processes to make L3
desire feature of products.
5 Estimation pouring and solidification time of metal casting L5
6 Design and adapt different gating system, runner and riser to cast L6
product/parts for different industry.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 1 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 1 1 3 2 - - - - - 1 1 3 1
CO6 2 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 3 2

Suggested Books
Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of Publication/
No. Reprint
1 Manufacturing Engineering and Technology; Serope Kalpakjian and Steven 2007
th
R. Schmid, 4 ed., Pearson.
2 Principles of Manufacturing Materials and Processes; Campbell-Tata McGraw 1999
Hill.
3. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Mikell P. Groover, 5th ed., Wiley 2013
Material and Processes in Manufacturing, E.P. Degarmo, Ronald A. Kohser, 2008
4.
and J. T. Black; Prentice Hall of India
5. Manufacturing Processes, P.C. Sharma, S. Chand Publication. 2008

Course Name : ELEMENTS OF THERMODYNAMICS

Course Code : ME1032
Credits : 3
L T P : 3-0-0

Course Objectives:
1 Understand the importance of thermodynamics.
2 Basic understanding of various types of thermodynamic systems.
3 Understand the basic principles of thermodynamics systems.
 7

4 Understand the various types of boilers.

Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASIC CONCEPTS: Introduction of thermodynamics, Concept of Continuum, 05
ThermodynamicSystem,SurroundingandBoundary,ThermodynamicEquilibrium,State,
1 Path, Process, cycle, Quasi-static Process, Reversible and Irreversible Process,
Working Substance, Thermodynamic Properties, Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics,
Temperature Scales, Concept of Heat and work in Thermodynamics.
FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS: Joule’s Paddle Wheel Experiment, 07
Mechanical Equivalent of Heat, First Law thermodynamics for closed and open
2 systems, Different forms of stored Energy, Enthalpy, Energy of an isolated System,
Perpetual Motion Machine of First kind. Flow Process, Control Volume, work and
Energy Equations, Throttling Process, Non-Flow work, Limitation of First Law.
SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS: Second Law of thermodynamics, 05
Heat and Work, Thermal Reservoir, Planck and Clausius statements, Energy Analysis
3 of Heat Engine, Refrigerator and Heat Pump, Reversibility and Irreversibility, Carnot
Theorem and cycle, Efficiency of the Reversible Heat Engine, Equality of Ideal Gas
Temperature and Kelvin Temperature.
ENTROPY: Clausius Theorem, Clausius Inequality and concept of Entropy, Entropy: 05
Principle, application, Irreversible Process, Transfer with Heat Flow, generation in
4
closed and open System, Thermodynamics Equations relating properties of System,
Reversible Adiabatic work in a Steady flow System, Entropy and disorder.
AVAILABLE ENERGY AND AVAILABILITY: Available Energy referred to a 04
5 cycle, Quality of work, Maximum work in Reversible Process, Useful work, Dead
State, Availability, Second Law Efficiency.
GASPOWERCYCLES: Air Standard efficiency, Mean Effective Pressure, Otto, 04
Diesel, Dual, Brayton, Stirling and Ericson Cycle, Comparison of cycles. Equation of
6
state of a gas, Properties of Mixture of gases, Internal Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy and
Specific heat of gas & mixtures.
PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES: P-v, T-s, h-s, diagram for a Pure 05
Substance, Properties of Pure substance with special reference to water, Steam and its
formation, Wet Dry, Saturated and Superheated Steam, sensible, Latent heat, Dryness
7 fraction and its determination, Separating and Throttling calorimeter Enthalpy, Entropy
and Internal Energy of Steam, Use of Steam Table and Mollier Diagram, Basic
Thermodynamic Processes of Steam in Closed and Open System and their
representation on P-V and H-S chart.
INTRODUCTION TO STEAM GENERATORS/BOILERS: Classification of 03
boilers, fire tube boilers, water tube boilers, comparison between water tube and fire
8
tube boilers, guidelines for the choice of a new boiler, essentials of a good boiler,
boiler mountings and accessories.
VAPOUR POWER CYCLE: Carnot and Rankine Steam Power Cycle, Actual 04
Vapour cycle Processes, Comparison of Carnot and Rankine cycle, Mean Temperature
9
of Heat Addition, Reheat Cycle, Ideal Regenerative Cycle Reheat Regenerative Cycle,
Feed Water Heater, Characteristics of an Ideal working fluid in Vapor Power cycle.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand various laws of thermodynamics and their application to various L2
systems.
2 Apply the basics of thermodynamics in various engineering applications. L3
3 Analyze the performance of vapor and gas power cycles, phase-change L4
processes, and other thermodynamics processes.
 8

4 Examine the close and open thermodynamic systems, and find the optimized L5
solution(s).
5 Analyze and effectively utilize the thermal appliances in day-to-day life. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 3 2 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engineering Thermodynamics, Gordon Rogers & Yon Machew, Pearson 2006
2 Thermodynamics, Yunus Cengel and Mike Boles, 9th ed., McGraw Hill 2019
3 Thermodynamics, C. P. Arora, McGraw Hill 2017
4 Engineering Thermodynamics, P.K. Nag, McGraw Hill 2005
5 Thermodynamics, D.S. Kumar, S.K. Kataria & Sons 2013

Course Name : MECHANICS OF MATERIALS

Course Code : ME1033
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to

1. Understand the advance topics of strength of materials and apply these to engineering problems.
2. Develop the basic skills and knowledge required to analyze stress, strain and failure in deformable solids.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
COLUMN AND STRUTS: Definitions, Euler’s theory of columns buckling, Euler’s 4
1
equation for various end restraints, Rankine and other empirical formulae.
SPRING: Close and open coiled helical springs under axial load and axial moment, 4
2
leaf springs, flat spiral spring.
DEFLECTION OF BEAMS: Relationship between bending moment, slope and 5
deflection, moment area method, method of integration, Macaulay’s method, Use of
3
these methods to determine slope and deflection for statically determinate and statically
indeterminate beams under various loading conditions.
THEORIES OF FAILURES:Different theories of failures including Mohr’s & 5
4 Octahedral theories and their comparisons; Graphical representation and yield locus of
these theories of failures for 2-D state of stress.
STRAIN ENERGY: Strain Energy of various types of loads under different loading 5
conditions, total strain energy for a 3-D state of stress, strain energy of dilation and
5 distortion for a 3-D state of stress, deflection of beams via strain energy approach,
Castigliano’s theorem, Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem of deflection and their
applications.
6 THIN AND THICK SHELLS: Thin cylinders and sphere, thick cylinders and sphere, 5
 9

comparison of thin and thick shell theories, compound cylinders, hub-shrunk on solid
shaft.

No. of
List of Experiments:
Hours
To perform Tensile Test on a given material and to determine its various mechanical 2
1
properties under tensile loading.
To perform Compressive and shear test on a given material and to determine its various 2
2
mechanical properties under compression loading.
To perform Torsion test on a given material and to determine various mechanical 2
3
properties under torsional load.
To perform Column test of a given material and to determine its Euler’s buckling load 2
4
and Young’s modulus of elasticity.
5 To perform Impact test on a given material and to determine its resilience. 2
To perform a test on close and open coil spring and determine its various mechanical 2
6
parameters.
To study and perform Fatigue test on a given material and to determine endurance 2
7
strength and limit of the material.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the philosophies of mechanics of materials in engineering and L2
applied sciences problems.
2 Evaluate any mechanical system as a model which is acted upon by L5
various loads and stresses induced in it.
3 Apply the concept of mechanics of materials on advance system for its L3
stress analysis.
4 Analyze the failure analysis under static loading in ductile and brittle L4
materials using different theories of failures.
5 Develop the vessels and other machine components. L6
6 Ability to conduct various tests on materials to assess their mechanical L4
properties.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO5 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engg. Mechanics of Solids, E.P. Popav, Pearson Education. 2003
2 Mechanics of Materials, FP Beer and R Johnson, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishers, India 2005
3 Mechanics of Materials, Gere, Thomson Books. 2004
4 An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids, Crandall & Dahl, McGraw Hill. 2012
 10

5 Mechanics of Material, Kirpal Singh, Standard Publisher. 2007

6 Strength of Material, D S Bedi, Khanna Book Publication. 2010
7 Strength of Material, R K Rajput, S Chand Publication. 2012

Course Name : THEORY OF MACHINES

Course Code : ME1034
Credits : 3
L T P : 2 -1/2- 2/2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to

1. Understand the basics of machines and mechanism.
2. Understand the concepts of kinematic diagrams, kinematic chains & mobility, mechanisms and Kinematic
analysis.
3. Understand various components used in power transmission devices.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASIC CONCEPTS: Kinematics and Dynamics of Machines, Mechanisms, Pairs,
1 kinematic chain, four bar chain, Inversions of single and double slider crank chains, 3
Degrees of freedom, Kutzbach’s equation. Grubler’s criterion, Joints..
VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION: Relative motion, displacement, velocity,
acceleration diagrams of different types of mechanisms, Relative velocity method,
2 3
instantaneous center method; Kennedy theorem, Klien’s construction, Coriolis
component, Numerical problems.
CAMS: Type of cams and followers, definition-basic circle & least radius, angle of
ascent. Dwell, Descent & Action; Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration diagrams of
3 3
followers, Simple harmonic motion, Uniform and maximum velocity, acceleration and
retardation, cycloidal motion.
GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS: Toothed gears: types, definitions and terminology,
pressure angle, path contact, arc of contact and approach, law of gearing, gear tooth
profiles, involute and cycloidal gear systems, interference in involute gears; Gear
4 5
Trains: Types, simple and compound, epicyclic and reverted gear trains; Sun and
planet gear, differential; Velocity ratio of worm and worm wheel, Helical and spiral
gears; spiral angle and efficiency; Numerical problems.
GYROSCOPE: Definition, axis of spin and precision, gyroscopic couple and effect on
5 movement of ships and vehicles, stability of two and four wheel automobile; Numerical 2
problems.
FLYWHEEL AND GOVERNORS: Turning moment and crank movement diagrams,
dynamics of simple horizontal and vertical engine. Fluctuation of speed, co-efficient of
fluctuation of speed and energy, Punching press. Simple problems; Governors:
6 6
Functions, types and characteristics of governors, Sensitivity, stability, isochronism
and hunting of governors, governor effort and controlling force curve, effect of sleeve
friction. Numerical problems.
BALANCING: Classification, static and dynamic balancing, Primary and secondary
balancing of rotary and reciprocating masses, swaying couple and variation of tractive
7 6
effort, hammer blow, partial balancing of locomotive, multi cylinder in line engines,
balancing of V-engines.

List of Experiments: No. of Hrs

To find displacement, velocity and acceleration of slider in a single slider crank 2
1
mechanism for different crank angles and draw various graphs.
2 Verify experimentally the gyroscopic couple is given by T = I.ω. ωp 2
 11

3 Draw experimentally the approximate straight line be watts mechanism. 2

Find out the positions of the four weights, so that the system becomes statically & 2
4
dynamically balanced.
Find the moment of inertia of a given body about an axis passing through C.G. and 2
5 perpendicular to the plane of the body also calculate the minimum oscillation of the point
of suspension.
Balance experimentally as far as possible the known unbalanced force due to a rotating 2
weight by introducing two balancing weights in two different planes
6
(a) Balancing planes on either side of unbalanced force
(b) Balancing planes on the same side of unbalanced force.
Determination of characteristics curve of the Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell Governors 2
7
using universal governor set up.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand and apply concepts of kinematics and dynamics on the L2 & L3
mechanism & machines.
2 Develop various cam profiles for engines and machines. L6
3 Analyze and develop gear trains required for various applications. L4
4 Understand the working of gyroscope, flywheel and governors. L2
5 Ability to conduct various tests on machine & mechanism to assess their L4
output characteristics.

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Theory of Machines, V.P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi 2014
2 Theory of Machines, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna publishers, New Delhi 1994
3 Theory of Machines, Shigley, Tata McGraw Hill. 1981
4 Mechanism & Machine Theory, J.S. Rao & R.V. Dukhipati, Wiley Eastren Ltd. 1992
Theory of Mechanisms, Amitabh Gosh & A.K. Mallik, East West Press Machines
5 2006
Private Ltd.
6 Theory of Machines, S. S. Rattan, McGraw Hill Education (India) 2014

Course Name : MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

Course Code : ME1041
Credits : 3
LTP : 2-0-2

Course Objectives:
 12

1. To impart the knowledge of tools and tooling system used for fabrication of metal powder, plastic and
ceramics parts.
2. To impart the knowledge about various machine tools and their applications in the conventional and non-
conventional machining processes used in metal cutting.
3. To impart the knowledge of advanced non-conventional machining techniques and their applications for
processing of conductive and non-conductive materials.
4. To impart the knowledge of rapid prototyping methods, rapid product development technique and its
applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
MACHINE TOOLS: Classification, Specifications, Working principle and
1 Applications of Lathe, Milling, Drilling, Boring, Broaching, Slotting, Sawing, Shaping, 4
Planning, Grinding machines.
PRINCIPLE OF METAL CUTTING AND MACHINING OPERATIONS: Single,
Double and Multipoint point cutting tools; Advanced cutting tool materials; Oblique
cutting, Orthogonal cutting; Mechanics of chip formation; Types of chips; Merchant
2 6
Force diagram; Tool life; Machinability; Machining parameters and their influence on
machining performance, taper turning, thread cutting, knurling, indexing, hexagonal
head, spline shaft and gear cutting.
POWDER METALLURGY AND PROCESSING OF CERAMICS: Principles,
Advantages and limitations, Methods of producing powders. Applications of powder
3 5
metallurgy parts, properties, Machining and Joining of ceramic metal powder
components.
PROCESSING OF PLASTICS: Polymerization, Types of plastics, Fabrication and
4 Processing of Plastics, Calendering’s, Rotational molding, Injection and Blow molding, 4
Helmet manufacturing, Machining and Welding of plastics.
ADVANCEDMACHININGPROCESSES: Need and objective of non-conventional
machining methods. ECM, EDM, WEDM, USM, EBM, LBM, AJM: Working
5 6
principle, Process parameters, Effect of process parameters on machining responses,
Applications.
RAPID PROTOTYPING: Introduction, classifications, RP methods and rapid
6 3
product development, applications.

List of Experiments: No. of

Hours
1 Gear cutting on milling machine 6
2 EDM of hard materials and study the effect of process parameters 4
3 Micro drilling using EDM process 4
4 Fabrication of plastic components using Injection molding setup 4
5 Product Development using 3D printing 4
6 Design and Fabrication for production of metal powder set-up 6

Sr. Course Outcomes Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Remember and exhibit memory of previously learned from Elements of L1
Manufacturing Processes (ME 1031).
Outline the basic concepts and understanding about the powder metallurgy, L2
plastic moulding and machining processes, machine tools and tooling
system.
2 Select the appropriate machining process for different operations apply to the L3
modern industry.
 13

3 Analyze the various activities of advanced machining processes and rapid L4

prototyping.
4 Evaluate and compare the performance of different manufacturing processes L5
with varying parametric conditions.
5 Formulate the ideas or innovative concepts for developing tools/machine L6
components using appropriate sets of manufacturing processes.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO6 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R.Schmid- 2013
4thed., Pearson Edition.
2 Manufacturing Science, Amitava Ghosh and Asok Kumar Mallik, East-West Press Pvt 1993
Ltd., New Delhi.
3 Advance Machining Processes, V K Jain; Allied publishers, New Delhi. 2002

Course Name : APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS

Course Code : ME1042
Credits : 3
L T P : 2 - ½ - 2/2

Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of thermodynamics as it applies to real systems.
To develop problem solving skill through the application of thermodynamics and use of lab studies to
2
reinforce knowledge gained in theory classes.
To introduce students about the various conventional applied thermal systems, such as IC Engines,
3
Compressors, Turbines, Condensers, Nozzles and Diffusers.
4 To analyze, optimize and design newer thermodynamics systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
I.C. ENGINES: Introduction to I.C. Engines, Construction and operation of 2-S and 4- 5
S engines, valve timing diagrams, Combustion in IC Engines. Performance of IC
1 Engines: Performance curves of C.I. and S.I. engines. Overall IC Engine performance
(engine sizing, mean effective pressure, power and torque), Effect of compression ratio
and air fuel ratio on power and efficiency of an engine.
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR: Introduction, classification of air 4
compressors, work input and the best index of compression, thermal and polytropic
2
efficiency of compressor, Effect of clearance and volumetric efficiency, Multi stage
compression and its advantages.
3 CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR: Principle of operation, components of a 3
 14

centrifugal compressor complete thermodynamics analysis of centrifugal compressor

stage, isentropic and Isothermal efficiencies, work done and pressure rise, Velocity
vector diagrams for centrifugal compressors and power calculation, pre-guide vanes
and pre-whirl, slip factor, power input factor, degree of reaction and its derivation,
energy transfer in backward, forward and radial vanes.
AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR: Component of axial flow compressor and their 3
arrangement, Principle of operation, velocity vector diagrams, thermodynamics
analysis and power calculation, Factors affecting stage pressure rise, work done factor,
4
Degree of reaction and blade Efficiency and their derivation, Isentropic, Polytropic and
isothermal efficiencies, Surging, choking and stalling in axial flow compressors,
Characteristics curve for axial flow compressors.
STEAM TURBINES: Introduction, General description of Impulse and Reaction 5
steam turbines, Impulse Turbine: General description, pressure and velocity
compounding, Velocity diagram and work done, Blade efficiency and overall
5 efficiency Reheat factor and condition curve, Reaction Turbine: Degree of reaction,
Velocity diagrams, blade efficiency and its derivation, Losses in steam turbines, stages
in turbine system, the HP and LP by-pass system, vacuum maintaining in a turbine,
load and speed governing of turbine.
GAS TURBINES: Introduction, classification of gas turbines on the basis of system 4
of operation and on the basis of combustion (at constant volume or at constant
pressure), Thermodynamics of constant pressure gas turbine cycle, calculation of net
6
output, work ratio and thermal efficiency of ideal and actual cycles.
Thermal refinements and their effects on gas turbine cycle, i.e., gas turbine cycle with
regeneration, inter cooling and reheating, multistage compression and expansion.
NOZZLES AND DIFFUSERS: Types and utility of nozzles, Flow of steam through 2
nozzles, Effect of friction, Nozzle efficiency, Critical pressure conditions for maximum
7
discharge, Supersaturated flow, Classification of diffusers, effect of friction and area
change, converging-diverging super-sonic diffuser.
CONDENSERS: Introduction, Elements of condensing plants, Brief description of 2
different types of condensers, Dalton’s law of partial pressure applied to condenser
8 problems, condenser and vacuum efficiencies, Cooling water calculations, Effect of air
leakage, Method of checking and preventing air infiltration, Description of air pump
and calculation of its capacity.

No. of
List of Experiments:
Turns
To study the construction and operation of a two stroke and four strokes petrol & diesel 1
1
engine and study of valve timing diagram for a Diesel Engine.
To find the Volumetric Efficiency, Brake Thermal Efficiency Mechanical Efficiency, 1
2 Frictional Power, Indicated Power Heat Balance sheet of Variable Compression Ratio
Petrol Engine at different Compression Ratios and study its effect on various parameters.
To estimate the Indicated Power, Friction Power and Mechanical Efficiency of a multi- 1
3 cylinder Petrol Engine when running at constant speed under constant settings of a
carburetor by cutting one, the power of one cylinder each in turn (Morse test).
To find the Volumetric Efficiency, Brake Thermal Efficiency, Mechanical Efficiency, 2
Frictional Power, Indicated Power, Heat Balance Sheet of Variable Compression Ratio
4
Diesel Engine at different Compression Ratios and Study its effect on various
parameters.
To study and draw the vapor compression cycle for a refrigeration test kit under different 1
5
variables.
To draw the fundamental vapor compression cycle for window AC test rig and calculate 1
6
its COP and cooling capacity.
 15

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand various thermal systems such as engines, compressors, turbines, L2
condensers, etc., and know-how their basic components.
2 Develop problem solving skills through the application of thermodynamic L3
principles.
3 Examine the performance of IC Engines through lab scale experiments. L4
4 Evaluate and optimize the performance of the existing thermal system. L5
5 Propose changes in existing thermal system and formulate new-ones. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO2 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 2 - - - 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 - 1 - 1 - - - 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Heat Engineering, Vasandani and Kumar, Metorpolitan Co. Pvt. Ltd., Delhi. 2013
2 Thermal Engineering, P. L. Ballaney, Khanna Publisher Delhi. 2005
3 Applied Thermodynamics, R. Yadav, Central Publishers, Allahabad. 2011
Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists, T D Eastop and A
4 2017
McConkey, 5th Ed., Pearson.
5 Basic and Applied Thermodynamics, P.K. Nag, 2nd Ed, Tata McGraw-Hill. 2017

Course Name : REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING

Course Code : ME1043
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic principles of Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Systems.
To learn the working and understand the construction of the various components of Refrigeration
2
System like evaporators, compressor etc.
3 To design air conditioning system for practical applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup Number
of
Lectures
REFRIGERATION: 2
1 Refrigeration effect, cooling capacity and C.O.P. of a refrigerator, E.P.R. of heat pump,
Reversed Carnot Cycle
AIR CYCLE REFRIGERATION: ANALYSIS OF BELL COLEMAN CYCLE; 3
2 Need of aircraft refrigeration and air conditioning; Analysis of different Air Cycle
Refrigeration Systems for aircraft.
VAPOUR ABSORPTION REFRIGERATION: 2
3 (Only Introduction: No Derivation) Simple vapour absorption refrigeration; Modifications
to simple vapour absorption refrigeration system; Actual vapour absorption refrigeration
 16

system Electrolux system; Lithium BromideWater absorption refrigeration system; Solid-

Vapour absorption and absorption refrigeration system.
VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION: 3
Vapour compression Cycle on P-V, P-H and T-S diagrams; Deviation of actual Cycle
4 from theoretical one; Mathematical analysis of theoretical and actual vapour
compression refrigeration cycle; effect of suction pressure, discharge pressure, sub-
cooling, superheating and pressure drop in valves.
MULTI-PRESSURE VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION : 4
Single load compound compression with single expansion and water intercooling; single
load compound compression with individual expansion valve and flash intercooling;
5 Multiple load systems with individual expansion valves and individual compressors;
Single Load Compound Compression with flash tank and water intercooling; Single
Load Compound with flash chamber as intercooler.
NON-CONVENTIONAL REFRIGERANT SYSTEMS: 3
Steam Jet Refrigeration; Cascade Refrigeration System; Mixed Refrigeration System;
6 Vortex Tube Refrigeration; Thermoelectric Cooling, Modern Air Condition Systems like
HVAC, Variable refrigerant volume (VRV/VRF)
CRYOGENICS: 2
7 Definition, Cryogenic fluids, storage and insulation; Linde-Hampson and Claude
Liquification Cycles (NO ANALYSIS); Adiabatic Demagnetization; Applications.
AIR-CONDITIONING: 3
Definition, Applications; Psychometric properties of air; Dry bulb, wet bulb and dew
8 point temperatures; Relative and specific humidity; Enthalpy of air and water vapours;
Human requirements of comfort; Effective temperature.
BASIC PROCESSES IN CONDITIONING OF AIR AND AIR CONDITIONING 3
EQUIPMENT:
9 Sensible cooling and heating of air; simple humidification and dehumidification of air
concept of bypass factor; cooling and dehumidification; Evaporative cooling; chemical
dehumidification; air washer.
LOAD CALCULATIONS AND SUPPLY AIR CONDITIONS: 3
Sources of heat load; sensible and latent heat load; sensible heat factor; apparatus dew
10 point temperature; quality and state of supply air for air conditioning of various
buildings; Load calculations for comfort and cold storage air conditioning.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic concepts of refrigeration, refrigeration systems, L2
and environmental impact of refrigerants.
2 Apply the laws of thermodynamics to solve various refrigeration and L3
air-conditioning problems.
3 Analyze and determine the performance of vapor compression cycle L4
under different operating conditions. L5
4 Understand the principles of non-conventional refrigeration system. L2
5 Develop understanding of psychometric properties and chart, L6
determine cooling load, and design the air conditioning systems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 2 1 -
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 2
 17

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, W.F. Stoecker, McGraw Hill. 1986
2 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Jordon and Priester, Prentice Hall of India 2009
3 Principles of Refrigeration, R.J. Dossat, Wiley Eastern 2001
4 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, C.P. Arora, Tata McGraw Hill 1997
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Manohar Prasad, New Age International (Pvt.) 2010
5
Ltd., Publishers.
6 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna Publishers 2012

Course Name : MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS

Course Code : ME1044
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to understand the
1. Causes, sources and the basic principles of mechanical vibrations.
2. Mechanical Vibration concepts to one, two, multi and infinite degree of freedom systems with different
systems components.
3. Concept of numerical methods applicable to study vibration in any engineering system design.
4. Concepts of modal analysis in study of vibrations.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Basic concept of vibration, Importance and scope, definition and 3
terminology, representation and analysis of harmonic motions/series and, Fourier series,
1
beat phenomenon, work done by a harmonic force on an harmonic motion, introduction
to various types of vibrations and types of excitation.
SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Undamped free vibrations: D’ 11
Alembert’s Principle, Energy method, Rayleigh method, Newton’s second law of
motion and its applications in these problems, equivalent spring stiffness, Damped free
vibrations: Introduction to viscous damping, sub-critical, critical and over-damping
2 systems and its solutions, logarithmic decrement, frequency of damped oscillations; Dry
friction, Structural damping and Slip damping and its analysis, Forced vibrations: Force
vibration analysis for constant harmonic excitation, rotating & reciprocating unbalance
masses, support excitation Vibration isolation and transmissibility, vibration measuring
instruments.
TWO DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Undamped and damped vibrations, 4
principal mode of vibration, normal modes, nodes, natural frequencies, mode shapes,
3
Torsional vibrations, application of Two degree of freedom in dynamic vibration
absorber.
MULTI-DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS - EXACT ANALYSIS: Undamped 5
4 free vibrations, Reciprocity theorem, Matrix Inversion method, Eigen values & Eigen
vectors, Free vibration analysis of string, longitudinal vibrations of bar.
MULTI-DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS- NUMERICAL METHOD: 5
Orthogonal properties of normal modes, Rayleigh, Dunkerley and Matrix Iteration as
5
applied to multi degree of freedom systems, comparison of natural frequencies by these
methods
 18

List of Experiments: No. of Hrs

1 To study the forced vibration of the beam for different damping. 2
2 To determine the radius of gyration ‘k’ of a given compound pendulum. 2
3 To determine the radius of gyration of bi-filar and tri-filar suspension. 2
4 To study the pressure profile of lubricating conditions of load and speed. 2
To determine the natural frequency of undamped torsional vibration of a single rotor 2
5
shaft system.
6 To determine the frequency of undamped free vibration of a cantilever beam. 2
7 To determine the frequency of damped force vibration of a cantilever beam. 2

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand & apply the concept of Mechanical Vibration in engineering and L2 & L3
applied sciences problems in general.
2 Apply the concept of Mechanical Vibration to one, two, multi and infinite L3
degree of freedom systems with different systems components.
3 Evaluate any mechanical system for its dynamic characteristics. L5
4 Develop the dynamic model of real-life problems and determine the natural L6
frequencies and mode shapes.
5 Compare different numerical and exact techniques to analyze multi degree L2 & L4
freedom system.
6 Ability to conduct various tests on machine to assess their dynamic L4
characteristics.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO4 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO6 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Mechanical Vibrations, G. K. Grover, Nem Chand & Bros, Roorkee 2009
2 Mechanical Vibrations, V. P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi 2020
Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibrations, J. S. Rao & K. Gupta, New Age 2002
3
International (Pvt.) Ltd., New Delhi
4 Fundamental of Vibration, Balachandran and Magrab, Cengage Learning 2009
5 Mechanical Vibration & Noise Engineering, A. G. Ambekar, PHI 2006
6 Mechanical Vibration, D. Nag Wiley. 2012
7 Mechanical Vibrations, S. S. Rao, Pearson Education Inc. 2017

Course Name : PRODUCTION ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME1051
Credits : 3
 19

L T P : 210

Course Objectives:
To imparts the specialized knowledge of CNC machines and CNC programming for machining
1
processes.
To impart the knowledge on design and fabrication of various types of Jigs, Fixtures, Dies and Tooling
2 used in manufacturing of various products.
To impart the knowledge of geometrical tolerances, surface finishes and fits system used in
3
mechanical assembly.
To impart the knowledge of process planning and process optimization, optimal machining speed and
4
maximum production rate with optimal cost.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
NC AND CNC MACHINES: Introduction, Components, Control systems, CNC 4
1 tooling and fixtures, CNC part programming: basic G-Codes and M-Codes, Canned
cycles, Manual part programming, Computer aided part programming (APT).
JIGS & FIXTURE DESIGN: Principles, design of jigs and fixtures, 6
degrees of freedom, principle of locating and clamping, hydraulic and pneumatic
2
locating and clamping devices, jigs for drilling, drill bushes; Fixtures: milling, lathe,
drilling, grinding.
TOOL AND DIE DESIGN: Press tool operations: Shearing, blanking, piercing, 6
trimming, shaving, notching, nibbling, coining, bending, drawing, embossing, stretch
3 forming; Press working equipment’s, Dies: Types, components of cutting die; methods
of reducing cutting forces; Die design: blanking die, piercing die, drawing die and
bending die, forging dies, design of die blocks, punches and strippers; Strip layout.
MANUFACTURING OF TOOLS AND DIES: Manufacturing of Single, double and 4
multi-point cutting tools, Carbide tool inserts, brazed tools, coated tools,
4
Manufacturing of Dies, die materials, various conventional and non-conventional
methods for die manufacturing, heat treatment of cutting tools and dies.
METROLOGY& INSPECTION: Limits, fits and tolerances, standard and limit 4
gauges, design of gauges, steps of inspection, introduction to coordinate measuring
5 machine and automated inspection technique, elements and relationship of surface
finish related to production methods and measurement; measuring devices used in
inspection and quality control.
OPTIMIZATION OF MACHINING CONDITION: Optimization of cutting speed 4
for minimum cost and maximum production, machining parameters optimization,
6
Machine Tool replacement, method of distributing depreciation, Introduction to reverse
engineering and applications.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the hardware of CNC machines, supportive tooling system such L2
as Jigs and Fixtures for smooth manufacturing activities.
2 Understand the fact and idea of various types of press working tools/ dies, L2
their manufacturing processes and quality inspection devices.
3 Interpret different types of geometric fits and selection of suitable L5
manufacturing process for required geometrical tolerances.
4 Design different types of tools and dies L6
5 Apply G-codes and M-codes for creating CNC part programming for various L3
machining operations.
 20

6 Analyse the different processes and effect of parameters through optimization L4

for effective manufacturing die and tools

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - 3 2 3

Year of
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Tool Design, Donaldson, TMH Publication 2010
2 Fundamentals of tool Design, ASTME 2010
3 Production Engineering, P.C. Sharma, S Chand Publications. 2014
4 Jig and Fixture Design, Edward G Hoffman, Cengage learning 2004
5 Manufacturing Technology (Machining), P.N. Rao, 2nd ed., Tata McGraw Hill. 2009

Course Name : PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code : ME1052
Credits : 3
L T P : 3-0-0

Course Objectives:
To impart the knowledge about the concept and significance of Production Management and Capacity
1.
planning.
To impart the knowledge about the plant layout heuristics/algorithms and applications of forecasting
2.
techniques.
3. To impart the knowledge on the Scheduling and Inventory control methods.
To impart the knowledge on the applications of PERT and CPM techniques and concepts of Reliability
4.
and maintenance.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
lectures
INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT: Types of production 5
1 systems, Product design, Standardization and simplification, Make/buy decision,
Concurrent engineering.
PLANT LOCATION AND LAYOUT: Mathematical Models for single facility location, 6
2 Euclidean and Rectilinear methods, Minimum location problem, Layout Design
Heuristics/algorithms: CRAFT, ALDEP and CORELAP, Group Layout.
FORECASTING: Time Series Analysis; Correlation and regression, Exponential 6
3 smoothing, Decomposition algorithm for seasonal data. Measuring and analysis of
forecasting accuracy.
CAPACITY PLANNING AND SCHEDULING: Plant capacity and capacity planning 6
4 strategies, Investment decisions. Appraisal of financial decision; Scheduling and
sequencing techniques in job and mass production.
 21

MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND INVENTORY CONTROL: Methods, principles 6

and needs of inventory control, EOQ, Probabilistic and deterministic models, Aggregate
5
Planning, Materials Requirement Planning (MRP-I) and Manufacturing Resourse Planning
(MRP-II).
PROJECT MANAGEMENT: PERT and CPM networks, Critical activities and floats. 6
6 Crashing of activities, Project scheduling with resource constraints, Resource leveling.
MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND RELIABILITY: Types of Maintenance: planned 7
and quality maintenance, reliability centered maintenance, predictive and proactive
7
maintenance, total productive maintenance, reliability and availability of systems,
reliability improvement.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand and illustrate the plant layouts using Design heuristics. L2
2 Apply the concepts of Production management and capacity planning in L3
Industries.
3 Analyze the forecasting techniques used in industries and service sectors L4
4 Apply the Scheduling and sequencing techniques in job shops. L3
5 Analyze the various inventory models in industries. L4
6 Recommend the different Project management techniques applicable in L5
projects and understand the concepts of Maintenance methods in industries.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 3 - - - - - 1 - 1 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 - 1 - - - 2 - 1 2
CO3 2 1 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 2
CO4 1 2 1 2 - - 2 - 1 - - - 1 1
CO5 1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 1 - - - 1 1
CO6 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 3 - 1 1

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Modern Production/Operation Management, Buffa and Sarin, John Wiley and Sons 2011

2 Operations Research - An Introduction, H. A. Taha, Pearson Publications 2010

3 Operations Management, P. B. Mahapatra, PHI Publication 2015

4 Operation Research, Gupta and Hira, S. Chand Publication, Delhi 2015
5 Production & Operations Management, Surya Prakash Singh, Vikas Publishing House 2018
Pvt. Ltd., Noida

Course Name : HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

Course Code : ME1053
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-0-2

Course Objectives:
 22

To understand the fundamental principles and laws of heat transfer and explore the implications of
1
these principles.
To formulate the models necessary to study, analyze and design heat transfer systems through the
2
application of these principles.
3 To develop the problem-solving skills and practice of heat transfer in real-world applications.
Total No. of Lectures –28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER: Conduction, Convection, and Radiation Heat 6
Transfer, Steady-State one, two and multi-Dimensional heat Conduction: Plane Wall,
Insulation and R values, Radial Systems, Heat-Transfer Coefficient, Critical Thickness of
Insulation, Heat-Source Systems, Thermal Contact Resistance, Mathematical Analysis of
1
Two-Dimensional Heat Conduction, Graphical Analysis,Shape Factor, Numerical
Analysis of Resistance Elements, Gauss-Seidel Iteration, Accuracy Consideration,
Conduction-Convection System Fins with uniform cross-sections, Lumped-Heat-Capacity
System, Transient Heat Flow in a Semi-Infinite Solid.
PRINCIPLES OF CONVECTION: Viscous Flow, Inviscid Flow, Laminar Boundary 5
Layer on a Flat Plate, Energy Equation of the Boundary Layer, Thermal Boundary Layer,
Relation between Fluid Friction and Heat Transfer, Turbulent-Boundary-Layer Heat
2
Transfer, Turbulent Flow in a Tube, Empirical and Practical Relations for Forced-
Convection Heat Transfer. Empirical Relations for Pipe and Tube Flow, Flow Across
Cylinders, Spheres and Tube banks, Liquid-Metal Heat Transfer.
NATURAL CONVECTION SYSTEMS: Free-Convection: Heat Transfer on a Vertical 2
Flat Plate, Empirical Relations, Vertical planes and Cylinders, Horizontal Cylinders,
3
Plates, Inclined Surfaces, Spheres, Empirical co-relation and analogy for turbulent flow
forced convection over extension surface.
RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER: Physical Mechanism, Radiation Properties/laws, 6
Shape Factor and their relations, Heat exchange between non-black bodies, Infinite
4
Parallel Planes, cylinders, spheres, Radiation shields. Solar radiation, Effect of Radiation
on Temperature Measurement.
BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Boiling types, mechanism, Pool Boiling: Nucleate 2
5 Boiling, CHF Flow Boiling: Plug/Slug flow, types, Mechanism Film-wise / Drop wise
Condensation
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Introduction, Analysis of Heat Exchangers: LMTD for parallel 4
flow HX, LMTD for counter Flow HX, Effectiveness for parallel Flow /Counter Flow HX,
6
Design of HX, Compact Heat Exchangers, Cross flow Heat Exchangers, Some Important
Topics from current research.
MASS TRANSFER: Velocities and mass fluxes, Governing equations of mass transfer: 3
7 Species mass balance, Heat and mass transfer analogy, Impermeable surface model, Mass
transfer driven flows.

List of Experiments: No. of Turns

1 To determine thermal conductivity of metal rod (Al, Brass and Steel) 1
2 To determine thermal conductivity of insulting metal. 1
3 To determine thermal conductivity of composite wall 1
4 To determine thermal conductance of heat pipe & compare it with other metal rods. 1
5 To determine thermal conductivity of insulator specimen by guarded hot plate 1
method
6 To determine heat- transfer coefficient in natural convection 1
7 To study heat transfer from a pin-fin in natural & forced convection mode 1
8 To determine heat - transfer coefficient in forced convection. 1
9 To find heat transfer coefficient for drop-wise and film-wise condensation process 1
10 To determine overall heat transfer coefficient & compare it with value obtained 1
 23

from standard correlation

11 Study of CHF & pool-boiling 1
12 To determine effectiveness of parallel/counter flow heat exchange 1
13 To determine Stefan Boltzmann constant of radiation heat transfer. 1
14 To determine the emissivity of a non-black surface 1

Sr. Course Outcomes Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Bloom Level)
1. Understand basic concepts of heat transfer through different modes. L2
2. Apply the concepts of heat transfer to different devices, e.g., cooling fins, L3
heat sink, radiation shields, etc.
3. Analyze and design thermal systems, for e.g., heat exchangers, boilers using L6
scientific and engineering principles.
4. Solve real time problems applicable to heat conduction, heat convection, and L4
heat radiation.

5. Relate the skill of mass transfer and its applications in cooling tower, air L5
conditioner, etc.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 2 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 - 2 1 1 - - - - 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engineering Heat Transfer, R.C. Sachdeva, New Age 2012
2 Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, Incropera, Dewitt, Wiley India Edition. 1997
3 Heat Transfer, J.P. Holman, Mc Graw Hill 2014
4 Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, M.M. Rathor, University Science Press 2015
5 Fundamentals of Heat & Mass Transfer, C. P. Kothandaraman, New Age 2012

Course Name : DESIGN OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Course Code : ME1054
Credits : 3
L T P : 3-0-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to

1. Understand the mechanical systems consisting of wide range of machine elements.
2. Understand the design procedure representing empirical, semi-empirical and analytical approaches.
3. Design and analyze a real engineering system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATION: Scope and meaning of design with special 5
1
reference to machine design, design processes, Concept of tearing, bearing, shearing,
 24

crushing, bending, etc. Selection of materials, Factors of safety under different loading
conditions, stress-concentration factors, Design stresses for variable and repeated loads.
Endurance limit and strength, Fits, tolerances and surface finish.
FASTENERS:Screws, bolts, preloaded bolts, uniform strength screws, bolts subjected 5
2 to shear, tension and torque, eccentrically loaded bolted joints. Welded and riveted
connection, eccentrically loaded welded and riveted connections.
SHAFTS AND AXLES: Review of torsional equation for circular shafts, Design of 4
3 circular shafts subjected to axial, bending and torsional loading and its combinations
under different theory of failures.
DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE MACHINE ELEMENTS: Belts (Flat & V), types of drives
and orientations of driving & driven shaft covered by flat and V belts along with design
4 of belts, pulleys, keys & shafts. Types of V-belts, their power ratings & design thereof, 6
Concept and application of timing belt. Chains- roller chains, their designation by IS,
designing w.r.t. sagging, centrifugal & transmittal loads, Complete sizing of sprockets.
BEARINGS: Types of bearings, Selection of a sliding and Rolling Bearings, Design of
Journal Bearing: Somerfield number, bearing modulus, material for journal bearing,
types of lubricants, their designated numbers. Concept of bearing body, oil &
environment temperatures, Calculation of heat generation and dissipation, Design of
5 6
bearing cap & bolts, Design of Rolling Contact Bearings: their designation w.r.t. duty,
type & diameter, Concepts of catalogue, average and rating life, Bearings subjected to
different loads for different time during one cycle and their equivalent dynamic load
carrying capacity.
DESIGN OF CLUTCHES & BRAKES: Design of Clutches: Axial and Radial
friction clutches, clutch load characteristics, mechanical (friction) clutches, design for
6 uniform wear & pressure theories, Centrifugal clutches design, Brakes: Design of single 6
& double block brakes, Concepts of self-locking brakes, Design of External & Internal
shoe brakes, Band Brakes and Band & Block brakes.
DESIGN OF GEAR DRIVES: Factors influencing the choice of a gear, Design
Details of Spur, Helical, worm and bevel gears, Nomenclature & designing of all these
7 gears from basics of tooth loading as done by Lewis and checks for dynamic loading by 10
Buckingham equations, beam strength, Wear load calculations and design of shafts for
all these gears.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic causes of failure. L2
2 Select the suitable materials, fits, tolerances and surface finish considering L5
manufacturing aspects.
3 Analyze stresses involved with static, dynamic and fatigue loading acting on L4
a mechanical system.
4 Apply the causes of failure in designing/sizing of mechanical components. L3, L6
5 Design a mechanical system with special focus on power transmission. L6

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
 25

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Mechanical Engineering Design, Shingle, J.E. Shigley & Charles R. Mischke, 6th ed., 2003
1
Tata McGraw Hill.
A Text Book of Machine Design, P.C.Sharma & D.K.Aggarwal,12th ed., S.K.Kataria & 2012
2
Sons, New Delhi
3 Machine Design, Robert L Norton, Pearson. 2012
Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, Robert C. Juvinall & Kurt M. Marshek, 2000
4 rd
3 ed., John Wiley & Sons.
5 Design of Machine Elements, V.B. Bhandari,2nd ed.,Tata Mc Graw Hill 2007
 26

Departmental Elective Courses

 27

Course Name : FINITE ELEMENT METHOD IN ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2001/ME4001
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1.To learn basic principles of finite element method as a numerical tool in engineering analysis& design
procedure.
2.To learn the theory and modeling of finite elements that represent engineering structures.
3.To learn finite element solutions to structural & dynamic problems through hands-on and simulation
exercises.
4.To impart the knowledge and skills needed to effectively evaluate and interpret finite element analysis.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to FEM and historical background, Brief overview of 6
the steps used in FEM, Various approaches to formulate elemental equations,
Difference among FEM, FDM and closed form solutions, Need to study FEM, Review
1 of the concept of stresses, strains, displacements and their relations, Von-Mises stresses,
equilibriums, boundary conditions, temperature effect, Concept and application of
Minimum Potential energy method, Rayleigh Ritz method, Galerkin Method and
Principle of Virtual Work as applied to elasticity problems.
MATRIX ALGEBRA & GAUSS ELIMINATION METHOD: Matrix algebra and 2
its different operations, Special feature of matrix algebra useful to FEM, Eigen values
2
and Eigen vectors, Positive definite matrix, Gauss elimination method to solve large
linear equations.
1-D PROBLEMS: Introduction, finite element modelling using bar element, shape 8
functions, Iso, super and sub parametric FEM formulation, Potential energy approach to
solve 1-D problems, assembly of elemental equations, Properties of global stiffness
3
matrix, types and applications of boundary conditions, higher order 1-D element and
their shape functions, its application to 1-D problem, Accounting of temperature effect
in 1-D problems.
TRUSSES PROBLEMS: Introduction, 2-D and 3-D trusses, concept of local and 4
4 global coordinate system and its transformation matrix, solution of 2-D and 3-D trusses,
stress calculations, Accounting of the temperature effect.
2-D PROBLEMS USING CONSTANT STRAIN TRIANGLES (CST): 6
Introduction, finite element modelling using CST elements and shape functions,
5 Potential energy approach, solution of 2-D problems, Accounting of temperature effect,
Problem modelling and boundary conditions for symmetrical problems, orthotropic
materials.
2-D ISO-PARAMATRIC ELEMENTS AND NUMERICAL INTEGRATION: 6
Introduction, Four-noded quadrilateral element-based FE Modelling and its solution,
6 Numerical integration, Concept of weights and Gauss points and its values, Formulae,
2-D & 3-D numerical integration and applications, Higher order quadrilateral and
triangular elements and it’s numerical integration.
BEAMS AND FRAMES: Introduction, Potential energy-based FE formulation using 6
7 beam and frame elements, Boundary consideration, shear stress and bending moment,
beams on elastic supports, plane frames, 3-D frames.
DYNAMIC PROBLEMS: Introduction, mass matrix as used in the FEM, elemental 4
8 mass matrix for different types of elements as studied above, Evaluation of Eigen values
and Eigen vectors.
 28

List of experiments No. of Hrs

Students shall be solving the different engineering problems on relevant CAD software 28
available in the laboratory.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the concepts of stresses, strains, displacements, matrix algebra. L1
2 Understand & apply the concepts behind various formulation methods used L2, L3
in FEM.
3 Select suitable type of elements for a problems and generation of global L5
equations.
4 Analyze and apply boundary conditions to form global equations for its L3, L4
solutions.
5 Interpret the output of FEM based software in more meaningful manner. L2
6 Ability to create model and simulate various machine elements for L6
engineering analysis.

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 3
CO5 2 2 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - 1 3 3
CO6 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 2 2 - 2 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Chandrupatala & Belegundu, 4th ed., 2015
1
Pearson.
2 Finite Element Method, J. N. Reddy, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 1993
3 Concept & Application of Finite Element Analysis, Cook et al., 4th Ed., John Wiley. 2004
4 The Finite Element Method for Engineers, Huebner et al., 3rd ed, John Wiley. 1982
Finite Element Analysis (Theory & programming), C. S. Krisnamoorthy, 2nd ed., Tata 2004
5
McGraw Hill.

Course Name : MEASUREMENT AND METROLOGY

Course Code : ME2002/ME3001/ME4002/ME6001
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand the significance of calibration, traceability and uncertainty.
2 Understand measurement errors and techniques to minimize the errors.
3 Understand the methods and instruments required for dimensional metrology.
4 Have a clear concept about the design of limit gauges and their applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
 29

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Elements of Measurement System, Selection of Measuring 4
Instruments, Types and Performance Characteristics of various Instruments, Static and
1 Dynamic Characteristics of Instruments, Type of Errors, Calibration, Accuracy,
precision, limits fits and tolerances, types of assemblies, linear and angular
measurements, design of limit gauges and applications.
DISPLAY OF MEASUREMENT SIGNALS: Electronic Output Display, Recording 3
of Measurement Data, Ultra-Violet, Fiber Optics and Digital Recorders, Presentation
of Measurement Data, Sensor Technologies, Capacitive, Resistive, Magnetic, Hall
2
Effect, Piezo-resistive and Optical Sensors, Intrinsic, Extrinsic, Distributed Sensors,
Ultrasonic Transducer, Ultrasound in Tracking 3D Object Motion, Ultrasound range
sensor.
SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEAURMENT: Types of Surface Texture, Surface 3
Roughness Measurement Methods, Comparison, Contact and Non-Contact type
3
roughness measuring devices, 3D Surface Roughness Measurement, Nano Level
Surface Roughness Measurement, Analysis of surface roughness texture.
MESUREMENT OF FLOW, TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE: Temperature 4
Measurement: Radiation thermometers, optical pyrometers, radiation pyrometer,
thermography, fiber optic temperature sensor, acoustic thermometer, Pressure
4 Measurement: Capacitive pressure sensor, fiber optic pressure sensor, intelligent
pressure transducer, Flow Measurement: Corilis Flow meter, Thermal Mass Flow
Measurement, Positive Displacement Flow meter, Electro-magnetic and Ultrasonic
Flow meter
MEASUREMENT OF FORCE AND TORQUE: Mass Measurement: Electronic, 4
Pneumatic, Smart and Intelligent load cells, Force Measurement: accelerometer,
vibrating wire sensor, Torque Measurement: Optical Torque Measurement, Rotational
5 Displacement Measurement: Circular and Helical Potentiometer, Rotational
differential transformer, gyroscopes, Rotational Velocity Measurement: Digital and
analogue tachometer, fiber optic gyroscope, Mechanical Flyball, Viscosity
Measurement: Rotational Viscometer, Falling Body Viscometer.
LIMITS, FITS AND TOLERANCES: Concept and types of interchange ability, need 4
for standard systems of limits, fits and tolerances, BIS standard system, selection of
6
limits and fits, design principles for limit gauges. Types and tolerance of limit gauges,
Taylor’s principle for gauges, problems on hole and shaft based fit systems.
MEASURING AND GAUGING INSTRUMENTS: Design principles of measuring 4
instruments: kinematics design, principle of alignment pivots and bearings, sources of
error in measurement, calibration and standardization of measuring instruments, linear
7 and angular measuring instruments, venire callipers, micro –meters dial gauges, bevel
protectors, sine bar, spirit level, Optical instruments: autocollimators, tool room
microscope length measuring machines, Comparators: magnification principles types
of comparators, mechanical optical, pneumatic, electrical and electronic comparators.
SCREW THREAD AND GEAR METROLOGY: Elements of screw thread, 3
measurement of major, minor and effective diameters of external and internal screw
8 threads, measurement of pitch and screw thread angle, effect of pitch error, elements of
gear metrology, measurement of gear tooth thickness, gear profile, gear concentricity,
pitch and run-out for involute gear, gear rolling test
MEASURMENT OF FORM ERRORS: Straightness, flatness, alignment errors- 3
9 surface texture-various measuring instruments-run out and concentricity,
Computational techniques in measurement of form errors.
INTERFEROMETERY: Introduction, Principles of light interference, 3
10
Interferometers, Measurement and Calibration, Laser Interferometry.
 30

COMPUTER AIDED LASER METROLOGY: Tool Makers Microscope, 3

Coordinate Measuring Machines, Applications, Laser Micro meter, Laser Scanning
11 gauge, Computer Aided Inspection techniques, In-process inspection, Machine Vision
System, Applications, LASER micro meter, Optical-LASER interferometers,
applications.
IMAGE PROCESSING FOR METROLOGY: Overview, Computer imaging 4
12 systems, Image Analysis, Pre-processing, Human vision system, Image model, Image
enhancement, grey scale models, histogram models, Image Transforms.

List of Experiments
Sr. Experiments Hours
No.
1 Measurement of screw thread element using tool makers microscope & optical 4
projector.
2 Measurement of angle using Sine Centre / Sine bar / bevel protractor 4
3 Measurement of gear tooth thickness using gear vernier caliper. 4
4 Measurement of surface roughness using tally surf 4
5 Calibration of Pressure Gauge, Thermocouple, LVDT, load cell, micrometer 4
6 Determination of modulus of elasticity of a mild steel specimen using strain gauges 4
7 Measurements using Optical Projector / Toolmakers’ Microscope. 4

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. (Blooms Level)
1 Remember and recall the basics of measurement system and equipments used L1
in industries.
2 Understand the principle of flow, mass, force, torque etc. L2

3 Apply the required knowledge of different equipment’s and comparators used L3

in industrial measurement.
4 Analyse the surface texture through knowledge of computer aided LASER L4
metrology technique.
5 Measure form error and identify the quality of product. L5
6 Design and calibrate the different measuring the equipments used in day to L6
day industrial activities.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 - - - 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 2 2

Course Outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
1 Apply the basic principles of measurements, various techniques and measuring parameters.
Demonstrate a critical awareness of the underlying principles of the different measuring instruments
2
and devices.
3 Apply the measurement methods and techniques of computerized image processing.
Recognize the latest measuring instruments for measurement of various mechanical and other
4
quantities.
 31

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 A text-book of Metrology, M. Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai & Co. 2009
2 Engineering Metrology, K. J. Hume, Mc Donald & Co (Publishers), London 1970
3 Metrology for Engineers, J.F.W. Galyer and C.R. Shotbolt, ELBS Edition, 1993
4 Engineering Metrology, Thomas. G. G, Butterworth Publiher 1974
5 Engineering Metrology, R. K. Jain, Khanna Publishers 2005

Course Name : AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2003/ME3002/ME4003/ME6002
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of all the sub-components of an automotive vehicle.
2 To give knowledge about all the controlling and electronic components.
3 To gain the knowledge about new technologies being used in automotive vehicles.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: History of Automotive engineering, Classification of Automotive 2
1
vehicles, Different sub-systems in automotive vehicles.
COOLING AND LUBRICATION SYSTEMS: Cooling systems and their 5
components, anti-freeze mixtures. Lubrication purpose and various systems of
2 lubrication, types and desirable properties of lubricants, components like oil filters, oil
pumps, and oil pressure indicators, air supply system, air filters, turbo charger and
super charger.
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEMS: Fuel injection system for petrol and diesel engines, fuel 5
pumps (mechanical and electrical), air fuel ratio requirements, carburetors: types and
3
general operation throttle body and multipoint fuel injection systems, electronic control
module and sensing devices.
TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS: Clutch function and types, torque converters; fluid 4
flywheel; manual and automatic transmission/ trans axles; constant mesh & synchro
4
mesh gearboxes, epi-cyclic gearbox, differential, propeller shafts and universal joint
front and rear axles.
BRAKE SYSTEMS, WHEEL & TYRES: Braking efficiency and stopping distances. 5
Types of brakes, Drum and disc brakes. Detailed description of hydraulic and
5 pneumatic brake. Mechanical, vacuum and electrical methods of brake actuation, servo
brakes, ABS, type of wheels, tyres, type of tyres; cross ply, radial tubeless etc.
specification of tyres.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Road springs, shock absorbers, independent suspension, 4
6
road springs, air suspension, hydro-elastic suspension.
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering geometry, details, correct steering angle, Ackerman 5
7 steering mechanism. Cornering power, over steering and under steering. Worm wheel
and Rack pinion types of steering gears. Safety steering columns, power steering.
IGNITION SYSTEM: Various ignition systems ( coil and magneto) and detailed 4
8
study of their components, electronic ignition system, distributor less ignition system
BATTERY AND STARTING SYSTEMS: Storage battery (lead acid type), 4
9
Maintenance free batteries, various components, Charging system, starting motors,
 32

starting drives, Bendix drive, Electronic starter control, starting system trouble
shooting.
EMISSION CONTROL: Emission norm like EURO and BHARAT norms, methods 2
10
and devices to control emissions.
MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS: Automotive accessories, hydraulic single lever and 2
two lever hydraulic systems for tractors, Technical specifications, controlling devices
11
such as fuel gauge, temperature gauge, indicator lights speedometer odometer, HVAC
etc.

No. of
List of Experiments
Turns
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and
1 operation of the Automotive Engine Systems & Sub Systems. 2
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and
2 operation of the Fuels supply systems. 1
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and
3 1
operation of the Automotive Clutches.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and
4 operation of the Automotive Transmission systems. 2
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and
5 2
operation of the Automotive Drive Lines & Differentials.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles
6 1
and operation of the Automotive Suspension Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles
7 2
and operation of the Automotive Steering Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles
8 1
and operation of the Automotive Tyres & wheels.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles
9 1
and operation of the Automotive Brake systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles
10 1
and operation of Automotive Emission / Pollution control systems.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Realize the need and importance of study of automobile engineering for L4
mechanical engineers.
2 Identify and compare the relative merits, demerits and applications of L3, L4
different systems and components in an Automobile.
3 Explain working of IC engines (Gasoline and Diesel) and various parameters L5
related to it.
4 Classify and Illustrate various elements of Automobile like, Transmission, L2, L4
Brakes, Suspension, and Steering etc.
5 Explain recent advancements in field of Automobile engineering, like, L2
Electric Vehicles, Hybrid Vehicles, CRDI engines, ABS etc.
6 Explain and illustrate various emission and safety regulations along with their L5
importance in automobile engineering.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
 33

CO3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO4 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO5 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO6 3 1 - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - -

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Automobile Engg., Kirpal Singh, Standard Publication distributors, Delhi Vol. I & 2009
1
Vol. II
Encyclopaedia of Automotive Engineering, D. Crolla, D. E. Foster, T. Kobayashi and 2015
2
N. Vaughan (Editors-in-Chief), Parts 1-6, Wiley
3 Automotive Engineering Fundamentals, R. Stone and J. K. Ball, SAE International. 2004
The Motor Vehicle, T. K. Garrett, K. Newton, and W. Steeds, 13 thed., SAE 2001
4
International.
5 Internal Combustion Engines, V. Ganesan, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill. 2007
Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and 2010
6
Design, M. Ehsani, Y. Gao and A. Emadi, 2nd Edition, CRC Press.
Car Suspension and Handling, D. B. Astow, G. Howard and J. P. Whitehead, 4th ed., 2004
7
SAE International.

Course Name : OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES IN ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2004/ME3003/ME4004/ME6003
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1 Understand engineering minima/maxima problems into optimization framework.
2 Learn computational procedures to solve optimization problems.
3 Learn software tool(s) to implement important optimization methods.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Optimization, Adequate and Optimum Design, 4
1 Principles of Optimization, Statement of an Optimization Problem, Classification,
Formulation of Objective Function, Design Constraints.
ONE-DIMENSIONAL UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION METHODS: 8
Optimality Criteria - necessary and sufficient conditions, Bracketing methods, Region-
2
elimination methods, Point estimation method, Gradient based methods, Sensitivity
analysis. Introduction to MATLAB tool and its application to these methods.
MULTI-DIMENSIONAL UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION METHODS: 8
Optimality Criteria, Unidirectional search, Direct search methods, Gradient-based
3
methods. Conjugate-direction methods, Quasi-Newton methods. MATLAB
application.
CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION METHODS: Constrained Optimization 6
4 Criteria, Penalty Methods, Method of Multipliers, Direct search methods, Linearization
methods, Feasible Direction method, Generalized Reduced Gradient Method.
NON-TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Traditional vs non- 4
5 traditional optimization, need for nontraditional optimization techniques, evolution of
non-traditional optimization techniques in engineering.
 34

GENETIC AND ANN TECHNIQUES: Genetic Algorithms, Simulated Annealing, 12

6 Particle Swarm Optimization, Fuzzy logics, Artificial Neural Network (ANN) based
Optimization. MATLAB application.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the fundamentals of Linear and Dynamic Programming problems. L2
2 Apply classical optimization techniques and numerical methods of optimization L3
to solve problems.
3 Analyze and make inferences of different evolutionary algorithms. L4
4 Explain and identify the importance of Integer programming technique and L5
apply different techniques to solve engineering problems
5 Adapt software as a tool(s) to implement optimization algorithms. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 2 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Optimization for Engineering Design: Algorithms and Examples, Kalyanmoy Deb, 2005
1
PHI, New Delhi.
Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Goldberg, D.E., 1989
2
Addision-Wesley.
Multi-objective Optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms, Deb, K., John Wiley 2009
3
and Sons.
4 Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice, S. S. Rao, John Wiley and Sons. 2009
Modern Heuristic Optimization Techniques: Theory and Applications, Kwang Y. Lee, 2008
5
Mohamed A. El-Sharkawi, Kluwer.

Course Name : MECHANISMS AND MACHINES

Course Code : ME2005/ME4005
Credits : 4
L T P : 3 -1- 0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to understand the
1. Concepts of various basic Mechanisms and Machines.
2. Kinematic analysis and synthesis of mechanisms.
3. Design process based on different mechanisms for a given application.
4. Mechanisms to be used for various machines and do failure analysis.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Mechanisms, classifications, relative and absolute motion, four 6
 35

bar mechanisms, planar and spatial mechanisms, inversion and equivalent linkage,
transmission deviation and pressure angles, kinematic analysis of planar motion,
relative velocity and velocity difference, pole and centrodes, relative acceleration and
acceleration difference.
KINEMATIC SYNTHESIS OF MECHANISMS: Movability, Number synthesis,
Frudenstein’s equation, Chebyshev spacing of precision points, Stages of kinematic
synthesis and errors, Two and three position synthesis of Four-bar mechanism & slider
2 10
crank mechanism, Overlay method, Bloch’s method, Transmission angle in four bar
and slider crank mechanism, function and path generation, Limit position & Least
square techniques.
LOWER PAIRS: Universal joint- single and double, calculation of maximum torque,
Oldham’s Coupling, steering mechanism including Ackermann’s and Davis steering
3 6
mechanism, concepts of power steering, Mechanism with lower pairs, pantograph,
exact and approximate straight-line motion, engine indicator, elliptical trammel.
BELTS, ROPES AND CHAINS: Materials, type of drive, idle pulley, intermediate or
counter shaft pulley, angle and right-angle drive, quarter turn drive, velocity ratio,
crowning of pulleys, loose and fast pulleys, stepped or cone pulleys, ratio of tensions on
4 tight and slake sides of belts. Power transmitted by belts including consideration of 6
creep and slip, centrifugal tension and its effect on power transmitted. Use of gravity,
idler, flat, V-belts and rope, materials, Length of belt, rope and chain drive, types of
chains.
FORCE ANALYSIS: Couple, equilibrium of forces and force systems, Free body
diagrams, D-Alembert principle, Forces on slider crank mechanism, quick return
mechanism & four-bar mechanism with more than two forces acting on a link, slider
5 6
crank mechanism, Forces and couples for link and reciprocating parts; Dynamically
equivalent system. analytical and graphical methods of solutions; Torque, inertia and
gravitational force of a four bar linkage.
BRAKES AND DYNAMOMETERS: Types of brakes, principles of friction brakes,
band, band & block and internal expanding shoe brakes, differential band brake,
6 description of vacuum brake, types of dynamometers, measurement of power by prone 8
brake and rope brake dynamometers, Heenan and Froude’s Hydraulic dynamometer,
Bevis-Gibson”s flash light torsion dynamometer, belt transmission dynamometer.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basic concepts of Kinematics and Dynamics L1
2 Understand and apply concepts of kinematics and dynamics on the L2, L3
mechanism & machines.
3 Analysis and synthesis of mechanisms using different techniques. L4, L6
4 Understand and evaluate various power transmission elements for their L2, L5
kinematic domain.
5 Dynamic analysis of various power transmission elements and mechanisms. L4

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
 36

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Theory of Machines, V.P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 2014
2 Theory of Machines, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna publishers. 1994
3 Theory of Machines, Shigley, Tata McGraw Hill. 1981
4 Mechanism & Machine Theory, J.S. Rao & R.V. Dukhipati, Wiley Eastren Ltd. 1992
Theory of Mechanisms, Amitabh Gosh & A.K. Mallik, East West Press Machines
5 2006
Private Ltd.
6 Theory of Machines, S S. Rattan, McGraw Hill Education (India) 2014

Course Name : VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL

Course Code : ME2006/ME4006
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to understand

1 Theoretical and practical aspects of noise and vibration.
2 About the sources of vibration and noise in mechanical systems.
3 About the measurement techniques and instruments used in industry.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Review of vibration theory, one degree, two degrees, and multi- 3
1
degrees of freedom vibration systems.
VIBRATIONS UNDER GENERAL FORCING CONDITIONS: Response under 7
2 periodic force of regular and non-regular form, non-periodic force using Convolution
Integral and Laplace transform.
MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS OF VIBRATIONS: Vibration measuring and 6
3 analyzing instruments. Various types of transducers, data acquisition system, vibration
analysis techniques.
VIBRATION CONTROL: Reduction of Vibration at the Source, Vibration Isolation, 7
4
Vibration absorbers, active and semi-active vibration control systems.
FUNDAMENTALS OF NOISE: One dimensional wave equation, Sound propagation 6
5 in 3-D space, important acoustic quantities and their relations, additive effects of
sound.
MEASUREMENT OF SOUND: Various types of transducers, measurement of sound 6
6
pressure, sound intensity and sound power.
NOISE CONTROL: Principles of passive noise control, sound absorption, noise 7
7
barriers, and active noise control.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Review the fundamentals of vibrations and sound. L1
2 Evaluate the vibration under general forcing condition. L5
3 Measure, analyze and control vibrations in a machine. L2, L4
4 Design and develop vibration and noise control systems. L6
5 Apply the vibration and noise standards on engineering systems. L3

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

 37

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Mechanical Vibrations, S. S. Rao, Pearson Education Inc. 2017
2 Mechanical Vibrations, V. P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi 2012
3 Fundamental of Vibrations, Leonard Meirovitch, Mc-Graw Hill Inc. 2001
Noise control in industry: a practical guide, Cheremisinoff, Nicholas, Noyes 2003
4
Publications, New Jersey.
Fundamentals of noise and vibrations analysis for engineers, Norton, M.P and 2003
5
Karczub, D.G, Cambridge University press, New York.
Fundamentals of noise and vibration, Fahy, Frank and Walker, John, Taylor and 1998
6
Francis, London.

Course Name : COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

Course Code : ME2007/ME4007
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1. Learn the basic principles of geometric modeling and surface visualization.
2. Learn the theory and characteristics of curves and surfaces used to represent engineering structures.
3. Acquire the knowledge for generating high quality images of geometric models.
4. Learn how the CAD tools are used to integrate databases.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
OVERVIEW OF CAD SYSTEMS: Historical Development, Geometrical Modeling, 3
1 Explicit and Implicit Equations, Intrinsic Equations, Parametric Equations, Coordinate
Systems.
MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTATION OF CURVES: Fundamental of Curve 10
Design, Parametric Space of a Curve, Blending Functions, Re-parameterization, Space
2
Curves, Straight lines, Spline Curves, Bezier Curves, B-Spline Curve, Rational
Polynomials, NURBS.
MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTATION OF SURFACES: Fundamental of 8
Surface Design, Parametric Space of a Surface, Re-parameterization of a Surface
3
patch, Sixteen Point form, Four Curve Form, Plane surface, Cylindrical and Ruled
Surfaces, Surface of Revolution, Bezier Surface, B-Spline Surface.
SOLID MODELING: Topology and Geometry, Set Theory, Boolean Operators, Set- 10
membership Classification, Euler operators, Graph Based Models, Boolean Models,
4 Instances and Parameterized Shapes, Cell Decomposition and Spatial Occupancy
Enumeration, Sweep Representation, Constructive Solid Geometry, Boundary
Representation.
GEOMETRIC TRANSFORMATIONS: Translation, Rotation, Scaling, Symmetry 6
5
and Reflection, Homogeneous Transformations, Orthographic Projections,
 38

Axonometric Projections, Oblique Projections, Perspective Transformation.

ASSEMBLY DESIGN: Assembly-Modeling, Analytical Properties, Relational 5
6
Properties and Intersections, Data Transfer Formats.

List of experiments No of Hrs

Students shall be practicing on how to generate the curves and surfaces used in CAD softwares 28
with the help of computer programming.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Create the different wireframe and surface primitives using parametric L6
representations.
2 Apply the concepts of transformations to evaluate the projections. L3, L5
3 Understand and apply the concepts of curves and surfaces to engineering L2, L3
problems.
4 Identify and compare the techniques for the representation of solid in CAD L2, L4
tools.
5 Ability to create 2D and 3D models of various machine elements using CAD L6
software.

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO5 3 2 3 2 3 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Ibrahim Zeid, McGraw-Hill. 2009
2 Procedural Elements for Computer Graphics, Rogers, D. F., McGraw Hill. 2008
3 CAD/CAM/CIM, Radhakrishnan and Subramanyan, New Age International (P) ltd. 2008
Computer Aided Design (Software and Analysis Tools), Krishnamoorathy, C. S. and 2005
4
Rajeev, J. S., Narosa Publication House.

Course Name : FRACTURE MECHANICS AND FATIGUE

Course Code : ME2008/ME4008
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course student will be able to understand

1.The physical and mathematical principles of fracture mechanics and fatigue.
2.Crack problem formulation through stress, displacement and energy methods.
3.The design principles of materials & structures using various fracture mechanics approaches with lower
factor of safety.
4.The modern theory of fatigue dealing with nucleation and rate of propagation of crack.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
 39

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
BACKGROUND: Introduction, kinds of failure & history, brittle and ductile fracture,
1 modes of fracture failure, different techniques of fracture mechanics, potency of a crack, 3
damage tolerance.
ENERGY RELEASE RATE (ERR): Introduction, Griffith’s work and his dilemma,
Surface energy, Griffith’s realization and analysis, Mathematical formulation of ERR, 6
2 ERR of Double Cantilever Beam specimen, anelastic deformation at crack tip, crack
resistance, stable and unstable crack growth, R- curve for brittle crack, Thin plate v/s
thick plate, critical ERR.
STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR (SIF): Introduction, Linear Elastic Fracture
Mechanics, stress and displacement fields in isotropic elastic material, SIF and its 9
3
mathematical background, Approach of Westergaard for different mode of fracture and
its analysis.
SIF OF MORE COMPLEX CASES: Other applications of Westergaard approach,
application of the principles of superposition, crack in a plate of finite dimensions, Edge 5
4
and embedded cracks, Relationship between ERR and SIF, critical SIF, bending and
twisting of cracked plates.
ANELASTIC DEFORMATION AT THE CRACK TIP: Investigation at the crack
5 tip, approximate shape and size of the plastic zone, effective crack length, effect of plate 4
thickness.
ELASTIC PLASTIC ANALYSIS THROUGH J-INTEGRAL: Relevance and scope,
6 definition of J-integral, path independence, stress-strain relation, discussion on J- 4
integral, Engineering Approach of J-integral.
CRACK TIP OPENING DISPLACEMENT (CTOD): Introduction, relationship 4
7 between CTOD, SIF and ERR for small scale yielding, Equivalence between CTOD
and J integral,
TEST METHODS: KIC test techniques, Test methods to determine JIC, Test methods to 2
8
determine GIC and GIIC, Determination of critical CTOD.
FATIGUE FAILURE: Introduction, Terminology, S-N curve, crack initiation, crack 3
9
propagation, Effect of an overload, crack closure, variable amplitude fatigue load.
CRACK DETECTION THROUGH NDT: Visual, LPI, Magnetic Methods, 2
10
Radiography, Ultrasonic

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall various kind of failures, ductile and brittle fracture of metals. L1
2 Understand various modes of fracture and analyze the behavior of L2, L4
engineering materials having microscopic flaws by various approach
3 Apply the concepts of fracture mechanics philosophy to design of structural L3, L6
components taking into account presence of flaws, nature of loading and
constitutive behavior of the material.
4 Apply the concept of fatigue failure of structure under variable fluctuation L3
loading to engineering problems
5 Understand the various test procedures to determine the fracture mechanics L2, L5
parameters of the materials.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
 40

CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Elements of Fracture Mechanics, Prashant Kumar, 1st ed., TMH, New Delhi. 2017
Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics, David Broek, Kluwer Academic 1986
2
Publishers Group, Dordrecht, Netherlands.
Fracture Mechanics - Fundamentals and Applications, T. L. Anderson, 3rded., CRC 2005
3
Press, Taylor and Francis Group
Fracture Mechanics by E. E. Gdoutos, 2nd ed., Springer International Publishing, 2005
4
Springer Nature Switzerland AG.
5 Elementary Fracture Mechanics, S. A. Meguid, 1st ed.,Springer Netherlands, 1989
6 Introduction to Fracture Mechanics, Kare Hellan, McGraw Hill Book Company. 1985
e-book on Engineering Fracture Mechanics: K Ramesh, Published by IIT Madras, India, 2015
7
URL: https://apm.iitm.ac.in/smlab/kramesh/book_4.htm

Course Name : EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS

Course Code : ME2009/ME4009
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives: To understand the

1.Relation between the theory of solid mechanics with experimental stress analysis.
2.Principles of photo elasticity in stress analysis.
3.Fundamental concepts about the experimental methods of stress analysis.
4.Use the experimental stress techniques on the practical problems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Stress at a point on an arbitrary plane in 3-D state of stress, 6
differential equations of equilibrium, Laws of stress transformation, principal stresses
and maximum shear stress, 2-D state of stress, displacement and strain, principal strains,
1
compatibility conditions, stress-strain relations, Plane stress and plane strain problems,
boundary conditions, Mohr’s circle and stress plane, Three-dimensional stress-strain
relations.
BASIC OPTICS: Basic concept and nature of light, polarization, decomposition of 4
elliptically polarized light, passage of light through isotropic media and crystalline
2 medium, normal incidence and oblique incidence, optic axis in refracting surface,
absolute and relative phase difference, quarter and half wave plates, production of plane
polarized light, light ellipse characteristics.
2-DIMENSIONAL PHOTOELASTICITY: Stress optics law, plane and circular 7
polariscopes, isochromatics and isoclinics, white light and monochromatic light source,
analysis of plane and circular polariscopes through trigonometric resolutions and Jones
3
Calculus method, dark and bright field arrangement of circular polariscopes, isoclinics
and isochromatics fringe order at a point, methods of compensation, calibration
methods, use of white light in Photoelasticity, reversibility of optical system.
PHOTOELASTIC DATA COLLECTION, ANALYSIS AND APPLICATIONS: 3
4
Photoelastic data, stress components, stress separation techniques and applications,
 41

properties of an ideal photoelastic material, casting technique, machining of

photoelastic casting, stress relieving, 2-D and 3-D applications.
BIREFRINGENT COATING METHOD: Theory of Birefringent coatings, reflection 4
5 polariscope, sensitivity of Birefringent coating, separation of principal stresses, sources
of errors, Birefringent coating materials and applications.
MOIRÉ-FRINGEMETHODS AND ANALYSIS: Mechanism of formation of Moiré 4
fringes, geometrical approach to Moiré-Fringe analysis, displacement field approach to
6 Moiré-Fringe analysis for in-plane and out of plane pr o bl e ms , out of plane slope
measurements, sharpening and multiplication of Moiré-Fringes, experimental procedure
and techniques.
BRITTLE COATING METHODS: Brittle coating materials, Relation between the 4
state of stress in coating and in the model, law of failure of brittle coatings and
7 interpretation of crack-pattern data, Isostatics and Isoentatics, relative merits of stress
coat and all temperature coating, Accuracy of brittle coating application, crack detection
techniques, calibration of brittle coating materials.
STRAIN MEASUREMENT: Classification and brief over-view of the strain 6
measurement devices, Electrical resistance strain gauge and types, gauge materials,
8 backing material of strain gauge, adhesives used, bonding of strain gauge, checking
accuracy of bonding, performance of strain gauge, strain gauge circuits, strain gauge
rosettes.
DIGITIZATION OF PHOTOELASTICITY: Basic concepts and methodologies of 4
digitization in photoelasticity, formulation of problems and applications, data
9
acquisition by digital image processing techniques, data analysis by statistical
techniques, data presentation by computer graphics.

List of experiments No of Hrs

Students shall be practicing to solve the engineering problems using photo-elastic bench and 14
other experimental methods of stress analysis.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall and review principles of solid mechanics L1
2 Understand the basics of optics as used in photo-elasticity L2
3 Interpret photo-elasticity data and evaluate stress & strain from these L3, L5
4 Apply coating techniques to analyze crack in the structure L3, L4
5 Understand and apply strain measurement device to determine the strain in L2, L3, L5
mechanical components
6 Acquire the knowledge on Moiré fringe method, digitization of photo- L2
elasticity and its application in experimental stress analysis.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
 42

No. Publication/
Reprint
Experimental Stress Analysis, L S Srinath, MR Raghavan, K Lingaiah, G Gargesha, B 1984
1
Pant, K Ramachandra, Tata McGraw Hill.
Experimental Stress Analysis, Dally, J.W. and Riley, W.F, 3rd ed., McGraw Hill 1991
2
Education.
e-book on Experimental Stress Analysis: K Ramesh, Published by IIT Madras, India, 2009
4
URL: http://apm.iitm.ac.in/smlab/kramesh/book_5.htm
5 Photoelastic Stress Analysis, Kuske A and G Robertson, John Wiley & Sons, London. 1974
Digital Photoelasticity - Advanced technique and application, K Ramesh, Springer- 2000
6
Verlag.
7 Experimental Stress Analysis, UC Jindal, Pearson 2012

Course Name : MECHANICS OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Course Code : ME2010/ME4010
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1.To acquire basic understanding of composites materials.
2.To develop an understanding of themacro & micro mechanical analysis of a lamina.
3.To develop an understanding of the micromechanical analysis of laminates.
4.To impart the knowledge about the failure analysis and design of laminates.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS: Introduction and Need of 6
composite materials, Classification of composite materials: Polymer Matrix
1 Composites, Metal Matrix Composites, Ceramic Matrix Composites, Carbon–Carbon
Composites, Characteristics of reinforcements and Matrix Materials, Recycling Fiber-
Reinforced Composites, Mechanics Terminology.
MACRO MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Definitions, Stress, Strain, 11
Elastic Moduli, Strain Energy, Hooke’s Law for Different Types of Materials, Hooke’s
Law for a 2-D Unidirectional Lamina, Reduction of Hooke’s Law from 3-D to 2-D,
Relationship of Compliance and Stiffness Matrix to Engineering Elastic Constants of a
Lamina, Hooke’s Law for a 2-D Angle Lamina, Invariant Form of Stiffness and
2
Compliance Matrices for an Angle Lamina, Failure Theories of an Angle Lamina:
Maximum Stress Failure Theory, Strength Ratio, Failure Envelopes, Maximum Strain
Failure Theory, Tsai-Hill Failure Theory, Tsai–Wu Failure Theory, Comparison of
Experimental Results with Failure theories. Hygrothermal Stresses and Strains in a
unidirectional and angle Lamina.
MICRO-MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Introduction, Volume and 10
Mass Fractions, Density, Void Content, Evaluation of the Four Elastic Moduli: Strength
of Materials Approach, Semi-Empirical Models, Elasticity Approach and Elastic
Moduli of Lamina with Transversely Isotropic Fibers for various types of modulus,
3
Ultimate Strengths of a Unidirectional Lamina for tensile, longitudinal compressive,
transverse compressive and in-plane shear, Longitudinal and transverse Thermal
Expansion Coefficients, Thermo-elastic Deformation Analysis, Coefficients of Moisture
Expansion.
MICROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF LAMINATES: Introduction, Laminate 9
4 Code, Stress–Strain Relations for a Laminate, One-Dimensional Isotropic Beam, Stress-
Strain Relation, Strain-Displacement Equations, Strain and Stress in a Laminate, Force
 43

and Moment Resultants Related to Mid-plane Strains and Curvatures, In-Plane and
Flexural Modulus of a Laminate, Hygrothermal Effects in a Laminate like
Hygrothermal Stresses and Strains, Coefficients of Thermal and Moisture Expansion of
Laminates, Warpage of Laminates.
FAILURE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF LAMINATES: Introduction, Special 6
Cases of Laminates: Symmetric Laminates, Cross-Ply Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates,
Anti-symmetric Laminates, Balanced Laminate, Quasi-Isotropic Laminates, Failure
5
Criterion for a Laminate, Design of a Laminated Composites, Other Mechanical Design
Issues, Sandwich Composites, Long-Term Environmental Effects, Inter-laminar
Stresses, Impact Resistance, Fracture Resistance, Fatigue Resistance.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basics of Solid Mechanics. L1
2 Understand the mechanical properties of various commercial composite L2
materials.
3 Analyze and evaluate the mechanical properties of Lamina at Macro and L4 & L5
Micro level.
4 Analyze and evaluate the mechanical properties of Laminates at Micro level. L4 & L5
5 Develop a methodology for stress and progressive failure analysis of L3 & L6
laminated composite structures to apply in aerospace, automobile, marine and
other engineering applications.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Mechanics of Composite Materials, Autar K. Kaw, 2nded., CRC Press. 2005
2 Mechanics of Composite Materials, Jones. R. M., Taylor & Francis Press 1999
3 Composite Material Science andEngineering,K.K.Chawla,3rd ed., Springer. 2012
Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials, I.M. Daniel, O. Ishai, Oxford 2006
4
University Press.
Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites, B D Agarwal, L J Broutman, John 1995
5
Wileyand Sons.Inc.,New York.
Stress analysis of fiber Reinforced Composite Materials, Michael W, Hyer, McGraw 2009
6
Hill International.

Course Name : VEHICLE DYNAMICS

Course Code : ME2011/ME4011
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2
 44

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic principles used in dynamic analysis of vehicles.
2 To gain the basic knowledge in the field of vehicle vibrations.
To understand the stability of vehicles and their effects related to longitudinal, vertical & lateral
3
dynamics.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASICS OF MODELING: Introduction to Vehicle dynamics, Fundamental approach 6
of Modeling, lumped mass, Euler Angles, Vehicle fixed and Earth fixed coordinate
1
systems, motion variables, Newton’s second law, Dynamic axle load, static loads on
level ground, Role of inertia, Road modeling.
TYRE DYNAMICS: Tyre forces and moments, Tyre structure, Size and Load Rating, 6
Terminology and Axis System, Tractive and cornering property of tyre, Camber
Thrust, Castor, Aligning Moment, Combined Braking and Cornering, Conicity and Ply
2
Steer, Performance of tyre on wet surface, Ride property of tyres, Magic formulae tyre
model, Estimation of tyre road friction, Test on Various road surfaces, Tyre vibration
and chattering.
VEHICLE VIBRATIONS: Measures of Ride quality, predictions of vibrations, 6
suspension stiffness and damping, road roughness models, response to speed breakers,
3
Heave, pitch and roll phenomenon of dynamic motion, quarter, half and full vehicle
model, Seat suspension, relation to human body vibrations.
SUSPENSIONS: Suspension Kinematics, Suspension types, Solid Axles, Independent 6
Suspensions, Anti-Squat and Anti-Pitch Suspension Geometry, Anti-Dive Suspension
Geometry, Roll Center Analysis, Suspension Dynamics, Multi-body vibration, Body
4
and Wheel hop modes, Invariant points, Controllable Suspension Elements: Active,
Semi-Active. Choice of suspension spring rate, Calculation of effective spring rate,
Vehicle suspension in fore and apt directions.
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering Linkages, Steering System Forces and Moments, 6
Steering System Models, Steering Geometry, Steady Handling (2 DOF steady state
model), Under and Over-steer, Effect of Tyre Camber and Vehicle Roll (3 DOF
5
steady-state model), Transient Handling and Directional Stability (2 DOF unsteady
model), Effect of Vehicle Roll on Transient Handling (3 DOF unsteady model),
Steady-State and Transient Handling of Articulated Vehicles.
LONGITUDINAL DYNAMICS: Dynamic wheel loads: Simple vehicle model, 6
influence of grade, Aerodynamic Forces and Moments, Resistance, Rolling Resistance,
6 Load Distribution for Three Wheeler and Four Wheeler, Calculation of Maximum
Acceleration, Reaction Forces for Different Drives, Braking and Driving Torque,
Prediction of Vehicle Performance.
LATERAL DYNAMICS: Steady State Handling Characteristics, Steady State 6
Response to Steering Input, Testing of Handling Characteristics, Transient Response
Characteristics, Direction Control of Vehicles Roll Center, Roll Axis, Vehicle Under
7
Side Forces, Stability of Vehicle Running on Slope, Banked Road and During Turn,
Effect of Suspension on Cornering, Latest Trends in Vehicle Dynamic Testing Like
Four Poster, Multi Axis Simulator.

List of experiments No of
Hrs
The experiment work in this course is intended to be carried out to simulate and study a quarter, 28
half and full vehicle models, behavior of sprung / un-sprung mass & lumped mass system and the
effect of different conditions on vehicle loading using MATAB and ANSYS software in the CAD
Lab. In addition, study of latest technologies available nowadays in vehicles helping to maintain
stability of the vehicle on the road.
 45

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basic concept of vibrations and automobile. L1
2 Understand the vehicle dynamics and apply the vibration concepts when the L2 & L3
vehicle is in dynamic condition.
3 Analyze the tyre dynamics with respect to force & moments. L4
4 Evaluate the effective steering geometry, vehicle handling and directional L5
control of vehicle.
5 Develop the aerodynamic forces & moments, load distribution in the different L6
vehicles.
6 Ability to model and simulate the vehicle using MATLAB and ANSYS L4
software to analyze the vehicle dynamics.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO6 2 2 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics, Thomas D. Gillespie, Society of Automotive 1992
1
Engineers Inc.
2 Theory of Ground Vehicles, Wong. J. Y., 3rd ed., Wiley-Interscience. 2001
3 Vehicle Dynamics and Control, Rajesh Rajamani, 1st ed., Springer. 2005
4 Vehicle Stability, Dean Karnopp, 1st ed., Marcel Dekker. 2004
5 Vehicle Dynamics: Theory and Application, Nakhaie Jazar. G., 1st ed., Springer. 2008
nd
6 Tyre and Vehicle Dynamics, Hans B Pacejka, 2 ed., SAE International. 2005

Course Name : KINEMATIC AND DYNAMICS OF ROBOTS

Course Code : ME2012/ME4012
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To impart the knowledge about anatomy of the robots.
2 To demonstrate the concepts of kinematics & dynamics of robot.
3 To demonstrate the robot programming and their applications in industrial robots.
4 To provide the knowledge of how industrial robots’ functions.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION OF ROBOTICS: Definition of a robot, Robot Anatomy, types of 5
1
robotic joints and motions, Classifications of robot: Physical configurations, actuators
 46

and motion control, Terminologies used for robotics specification and selection for
industrial applications, Design and Control issues, manipulation and control, end
effector.
COORDINATE FRAMES, MAPPING AND TRANSFORMS: Coordinate frames: 7
Mapping between rotated frames, Mapping between translated frames, Mapping
between combined rotated and translated frames, Description of objects in space,
2
Transformation of vectors, composite transformation, inverting a homogeneous
transform, Fundamental rotation matrices: Principal axes rotation, fixed angle
representation, Euler angle representation, equivalent angle axis representation.
ROBOT KINEMATICS: Mechanical structure and notation, description of links and 8
joints, kinematic modeling of the Robot, Denavit-Hartenberg notation, Kinematic
3
relationship between adjacent links, Robot transformation matrix, forward and inverse
kinematics for basic industrial robotic configurations.
JACOBIAN FOR VELOCITY AND STATIC FORCES: Notation for time varying 6
position and orientation, linear and rotational velocity of rigid bodies, angular velocity,
4 motion of the link of a robot, velocity propagation of link to link, Jacobians,
singularities, static forces in robots, Jacobian in the force domain, Cartesian
transformation of velocities and static forces.
ROBOT DYNAMICS: Introduction to Lagrangian mechanics and Dynamic equation 6
5 for 2 DOF robots, Introduction to position control and force control of robotic robots,
Robot actuation and control using PID controllers.
ROBOT PROGRAMMING: Programming methods, Robot language classification, 4
6 Robot language structure, elements and its functions, Motion, End-effecter and sensor
commands in VAL programming language.
ROBOT VISION: Sensing and digitization of vision data, Image Processing: image 6
7 data reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition and training of
vision system.

List of experiments No of
Hrs
The experiment work in this course is intended to be carried out in the area of basic of Industrial 28
Robotics, Robot Analyzer for learning different robot configuration, robot kinematics and
programming in the Simens CoE Robotics Lab.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basics concepts of robots and apply the transformations for L2 & L3
mapping of frames and axis rotations
2 Develop the forward and inverse kinematics of robots. L6
3 Analyze the forces in links and joints of a robot. L4
4 Apply the Lagrange equation to evaluate the dynamics of a robotic arm. L3 & L5
5 Understand the robot vision and robot Programming methods and language to L2
perform tasks in industrial applications.
6 Ability to program a robot for different robot configuration to perform L4
different tasks.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
 47

CO4 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 2
CO6 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 - 2 2 - 2 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Fundamental concepts and analysis, Ashitava Ghosal, Robotics, Oxford University 2006
1
Press.
Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence, K. S. Fu, R. C. Gonzalez, C. S. G. 1987
2
Lee, McGraw-Hill.
3 Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, John. J. Craig, PHI. 2005
Robotic Engineering An Integrated Approach, R. D. Klafter, T.A. Chmielewski, M. 2007
4
Negin, PHI.
Fundamentals of Robotics: Analysis & Control, Robert J. Schilling, Pearson 2000
5
Education.
6 Robotics, K. K. Appuu Kuttan, I K Internationals 2007

Course Name : WORK STATION DESIGN AND NEURO-ERGONOMICS

Course Code : ME2013/ME4013
Credits : 4
L T P : 310

Course Objectives:
This course is designed to teach the fundamentals of Designing of Ergonomically correct Work
1
Stations
To study latest techniques used in the evaluation of human work in all contexts that leads
2 systematically to the investigation of all the factors which affect the efficiency and economy of human
energy at the work place
It helps in designing and improvement in the methods and procedures which are most effective, require
3
the least efforts and are the best suited to the industrial workers.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Contents No. of
S. No.
Lectures
WORK STUDY FUNDAMENTALS: Definitions, Scope and applications, 3
1 Productivity and Work Study, Analysis of Work Content, Introduction to Industrial
Engineering and Productivity, Measurement tools of productivity.
METHOD STUDY: Process Analysis, Process and Activity Charts, Operation 5
2
Analysis, Basic Procedure, Micro Motion Study, Principles of Motion Economy.
WORK MEASUREMENT: Purposes and Uses, Basic Procedure, Techniques: Work 8
Sampling, Rating and Allowances, Setting Standard Times for Jobs, Standard Data,
3
Predetermined Motion Time Systems, MTM, Work factor and MOST, Job Evaluation
of Merit Rating, Wage Incentive Plans.
ERGONOMICS AND RISK ASSESSMENT: Concepts, Issues in Work System 8
Design, Measuring Work by Physiological Means, Work Posture, Fatigue
4 Measurement & Evaluation, Work Systems, Limitation of Man & Machine with
respect to each other by risk assessment techniques such as RULA, REBA, OCRA,
NIOSH, SI, PLIBEL, QEC and OWAS.
WORK LOAD MEASUREMENT: Human Motor Activity, Anatomy of human 10
5 muscles and brain lobes, Metabolism, Physical and Mental Work load and their
Measurement, Introduction to work related musculoskeletal disorders and mental
 48

fatigue, Introduction to Neuro-ergonomics and quantification of neuro-signals from

electro-encephalography and electromyography by linear and non-linear techniques
with respect to work duration and rest periods, Introduction to Digital Human
Modelling Techniques.
CLIMATES AND NOISE EVALUATION: Heat Humidity: Body heat Balance, 8
Effective Temperature Scales, Zones of Discomfort, Effects of Heat on Body and Work
Performance, Vibration: Response of Body to Low Frequency Vibration, Vibrations
and Discomfort, Effect on Health of Worker, Effect of High Frequency Vibrations,
6
Methods of Reducing Vibrations, Analysis, Noise: Physiological Effects of Noise,
Annoyance of Noise, Speed Interference, Hearing Loss, Temporary and Permanent
Threshold Shift, Effect of Noise on Performance, Reduction of Noise, Personal Noise
Protection.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Assess all industrial activities with respect to motion study and there by L5 & L6
design work stations.
2 Quantification of physical and mental work load of the workers by latest L5
neurological techniques.
3 Identify and assess the environmental and climatic working conditions in L2 & L5
industry.
4 Analyze and apply different risk assessment techniques to predict risk L3 & L4
involved in work with respect to development of musculoskeletal disorders.
5 Application of all latest time study techniques to calculate standard time to L3
carry-out any industrial job.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 - 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 1 1 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Motion and Time Study, Design and Measurement of Work, Ralph M. Barnes, Wiley 2009
1
India.
2 Neuro-Ergonomics, Raja Parasuraman & Mathew Rizzo, Oxford University Press. 2007
Handbook of Digital Human Modelling, Vincent G. Duffy, CRC Press Taylor & 2009
3
Francis Group.
Ergonomics Laboratory Exercises, Timothy Joseph Gallwey & Leonard William O’ 2009
4
Sullivan, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group.
International Standard Manual of Ergonomics, Part-1: Lifting and Carrying; Part-2: 2009
5
Pushing and Pulling, Part-3: Handling of Low Loads at High Frequency.

Course Name : COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING

Course Code : ME2014/ME4014
Credits : 4
 49

L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of

1 Automation and NC, CNC machining techniques.
2 Industry 4.0, importance and application of robots in manufacturing.
3 Design of automated guided vehicle and flexible manufacturing system systems.
Design the manufacturing cell, concept of group technology, computer aided process planning and
4
cellular manufacturing system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO CIM: Definition, scope and elements of CIM system, benefits, 4
Production system facilities, Manufacturing support systems, Automation in production
1
systems, Automated manufacturing systems, Computerized Manufacturing Support
Systems, Need, principles and strategies of automation.
NC and CNC MACHINES: Basic components, NC coordinate and motion control 8
systems, Machine Control Unit for CNC and DNC, CNC Software, advantages,
disadvantages and applications; Construction of CNC machines: Machine structure,
Static, dynamic and thermal load; Guide ways: Friction, V-guide, Flat & dove-tail,
2
Cylindrical, Anti frictional linear motion; Feed drives: Servomotors, Mechanical
transmission system, Spindle and drives; Bearings: Hydrodynamic, Hydrostatic and
Antifriction bearings; Measuring systems: direct, indirect measuring and gauging, tool
monitoring; Automatic tool and pallet changer.
PART PROGRAMMING: Coordinate system, Dimensioning, Axes and motion 6
nomenclature, Importance of reference systems like machine zero, part zero and
machine reference point, CNC part programming: Structure of part programme,
3
Preparatory functions (G); Miscellaneous functions (M), Tool compensation,
Subroutines (Macros) (L), Canned cycles, Mirror image, Simple part programming’s for
milling and turning operations.
COMPUTERISED PROCESS PLANNING: Process planning and Computer Aided 4
Process Planning (CAPP), Aggregate Production Planning and the Master Production
4
Scheduling, Material requirement planning, Capacity planning, computerize shop floor
and inventory control, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Simple Problems.
CELLULAR MANUFACTURING: Group Technology(GT), Part Families, Parts 4
Classification and coding, Simple Problems in Optiz Part Coding system, Cellular
5
Manufacturing, Composite part, Machine cell design and layout, Rank and Order
Clustering Method, Arranging Machines in a GT cell-Hollier Method.
FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM AND AUTOMATED GUIDED 4
VEHICLE SYSTEM: Types of Flexibility, FMS: Components, planning, control and
6
quantitative analysis, application & benefits; AGVS: Vehicle Guidance technology,
Vehicle management and safety, Applications.
INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS: Robot anatomy and attributes, Classification, Robot 8
7 Control systems, End Effectors, Sensors, Accuracy and Repeatability; Applications,
Robot Part Programming for pick and place for Simple Problems.
INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRY4.0: The Fourth Revolution, Smart Factories, 4
Industry 4.0: Cyber Physical Systems and Next Generation Sensors, Collaborative
8
Platform and Product Lifecycle Management, Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality,
Artificial Intelligence, Big Data and Advanced Analysis

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the computer Integrated Manufacturing systems comprising CNC L2
 50

machines, Industrial robots and IoT enabled activities.

2 Compare and judge the various components of CNC machines including L5
machine controller, servomotors, guide ways, spindles, bearings, tool
changers, positions sensors etc.
3 Apply the principle of part-programming for computer aided process L3
planning in manufacturing systems.
4 Design automated material handling and storage systems using computer L6
integrated data management system.
5 Analyzing the flexible manufacturing cells using concept in group L4
technology, industrial robotics and computer aided process planning.
6 Understand the opportunities, challenges of Industry 4.0 for organizations L2
and individuals.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - 2 3 2
CO6 3 3 2 1 1 - 1 - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Automation, production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Mikell P 2012
1
Groover, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Delhi
System Approach to Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Nanua Singh, Wiley &Sons 1996
2
Inc.
CAD/CAM/CIM, Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S. and Raju V., 2nd Edition, New 2000
3
Age International (P) Ltd, New Delhi.
Computer Aided Manufacturing, Rao. P, N Tewari &T.K. Kundra, Tata McGraw Hill 2000
4
Publishing Company,

Course Name : PRECISION ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2015/ME4015
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the concept of precision engineering and its principles.
2. To familiarize the importance as applicable to instruments and machines.
3. To familiarize with MEMS-principle, elements-characteristics-design and application.
4. To familiarize with the nanotechnology and electrochemical atomic bit processing.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
 51

Lectures

CONCEPT OF PRECISION ENGINEERING: Introduction to accuracy &

precision, need and applications of precision engineering, Tool based Micro & Ultra
1 6
precision processes, Materials for tools and machine elements, ceramic, CBN &
diamond micro tools.
ULTRA-PRECISION MACHINE ELEMENTS: Introduction of Guide ways,
2 Drive systems, Spindle drive, preferred numbers, Rolling elements, hydrodynamic & 6
hydrostatic bearings, pneumatic bearing.
MEMS: Introduction, Principle, Elements, Characteristics, Design, applications in
3 automobile, defense, aerospace, medical sectors. 6
ERROR CONTROL: Error, Sources, Static stiffness, Variation of the cutting force,
total compliance, Machining methods: milling, drilling, grinding; Thermal effects:
4 heat source, heat dissipation, Stabilization, decreasing of thermal effects; effects of 7
forced vibration on accuracy, clamping & setting errors, errors due to locations and
Control, principle of constant location surfaces.
SURFACE ENGINEERING: Surface finish, Relationship between attainable
5 tolerance grades and different machining processes, Cumulative effect of tolerances, 5
sure fit law, normal law and truncated normal law related to surface finish.
FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY: System of nano-meter
6 accuracies, Mechanism of metal Processing, Nano physical processing of atomic bit 6
units, Nanotechnology and Electrochemical atomic bit processing.
MEASURING SYSTEMS: In-processing and in-situ measurement of position, Post
7 process and on-machine measurements, dimensional, mechanical and optical 6
measuring systems.

List of practical’s / mini-projects Hours

1 Experiments on Micro EDM and analysis of accuracy & precision of machined surface finish 8
2 Mini project on MEMS. 8
3 Micro gear cutting and analysis of accuracy, clamping & setting errors. 6
4 Grinding analysis of thermal effects. 6

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Understanding the concept and need for Precision Engineering. L2
2 Apply the concept of precision engineering and its principle in the ultra- L3
precision domain.
3 Analyse the tolerance grades and physical processes applied to surface L4
engineering.
4 Design the various components of MEMS for different industries. L6
5 Measure and Judge to select different measuring systems used in precision L5
engineering.
6 Estimate the error and analyse the thermal effects on machining methods L5
applied to manufacturers of precision components.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
 52

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 2 - - 2 3 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 3 - 1 - - - - 2 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 2 3 2

Text Books:
Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of
No. Publication/Reprint
1 Nakazawa, H. Principles of Precision Engineering, Oxford University Press, 1994
2 Nano Technology, Norio Taniguchi, Oxford University Press. 1996
Precision Engineering in Manufacturing, Murthy R. L., New Age International 1996
3
(P) Limited.
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing, James D. Meadows, Marcel Dekker 1995
4
Inc.

Course Name : ADVANCE MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES

Course Code : ME2016/ME4016
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of

1. Surface modification, PVD, CVD, cladding, diffusion and diamond coating.
2. Rapid prototyping, hybrid and micro machining.
3. Advance mechanical, thermal, chemical and electrochemical non-conventional machining.
5. Advance finishing process and fabrication of microelectronic devices.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Trends in modern manufacturing, Classification of advanced 6
manufacturing, Surface modification: Advanced ceramic and organic methods, cleaners,
1
Electro forming, physical and chemical vapour deposition, thermal spraying, ion
implantation, diffusion coating, diamond coating and cladding.
NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING: Mechanical methods: USM, AJM, AWJM 10
processes: Principle, process parameters, description, mechanics of material removal rate,
effect of parameters on machining responses, capabilities, limitations and applications;
Chemical and electrochemical methods: Fundamental and mechanics of material removal;
CH, ECM, ECG, Electrochemical deburring, Electrochemical honing processes: description,
2
material removal rate, effect of process parameters on performance characteristics,
capabilities, limitations and applications; Thermal methods: EDM, WEDM, LBM, EBM,
PAM, PAW processes: Principles, mechanics of material removal rate, equipment, analysis
of circuits, performance characterization, effect of process parameters on MRR and surface
finish, capabilities, limitations and applications.
HYBRID AND MICRO MACHINING: Hybrid machining: Concept, Classification. 8
ECSM, TWECDM, LAECSM, VAEDM, EDG, Process description, performance
characterization, parametric effect, capabilities, limitations and applications;
3
Micromachining: Introduction to micro machining, micro-turning, micro-milling, micro-
drilling, micro EDM, micro-WEDM, micro ECM: Process parameters, MRR, performance
characterization, parametric effect, capabilities, limitations and applications.
RAPID PROTOTYPING: Importance and Types, Principles and advantages, Stereo
5 lithography, FDM, SLS, factors effecting the responses of RP, Accuracy and Economic 5
considerations.
 53

ADVANCE FINISHING PROCESS: AFM, MRF, MRAFF, MFP, EEM, CMP: Process
6 description, mechanics of finishing, performance characterization, parametric effect, 6
capabilities, limitations and applications.
FABRICATION OF MICROELECTRONIC DEVICES: Crystal growth and wafer 7
preparation, Film Deposition oxidation, lithography, bonding and packaging, reliability and
7
yield, Printed Circuit boards, computer aided design in microelectronics, Integrated circuit
and surface mount technology, E-Manufacturing, nanotechnology and MEMS.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall previously learnt basic concept of manufacturing and trends in modern L1
manufacturing
2 Understand the philosophies of advanced and modern manufacturing L2
3 Plan and apply the concept of non-traditional and hybrid machining L3
4 Analyse the effects of various process parameters on process performance L4
characteristics.
5 Ability to decide the appropriate manufacturing processes for quality finishing in L5
nano domain.
6 Adapt e-manufacturing, nanotechnology and MEMS for fabrication of L6
microelectronic devices.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 1 3 1
CO6 1 1 1 2 3 - - - - - 1 1 2 2

Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of Publication/

Reprint
1. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Kalpakijian, Adisson Wesley 1995
2. Process and Materials of Manufacturing, R. A. Lindburg, 4th edition, PHI 1990
3. Foundation of MEMS, Chang Liu, Pearson publications. 2012
4. Advanced Machining Processes, V.K.Jain, Allied Publications 2007
5. Introduction to Manufacturing Processes, John A Schey, Mc Graw Hill 2012

Course Name : PRODUCTION PLANNING & CONTROL

Course Code : ME2017/ME4017
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge about the:

1. Concept and significance of Production planning & control.
2. Plant capacity, location, layout and its applications.
3. Routing, Scheduling, Purchasing and Dispatching.
4. New trends in operations management used in industries.
 54

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
lectures
INTRODUCTION: Objectives of production planning and control, functions and its 4
1
advantages, types of controls and procedures.
PLANNING: Capacity planning, types of capacity plans, factors affecting the plant 8
capacity, capacity planning strategies, investment decisions, comparison of alternatives,
2
planning for making or buying, types of plans, mathematical planning techniques,
analysis of machine capacity, planning for labour, aggregate production planning.
ROUTING: Definition, routing procedure including bills of materials, route sheet, 8
route file, routing for two or more items, standard route chart and recent techniques of
3 routing.
SCHEDULING: Master schedule, departmental and shop schedule charts for
scheduling, Gantt chart, loading and scheduling.
PURCHASING AND STORING: Planning for purchasing, procurement schedule, 6
purchase requisition, calling tenders, comparative statements, placing orders, receiving
4 materials, inspection entry and payment, foreign purchase: imports, documents and
books. Location and layout of store-room, bins, racks, bar-codes and boxes used in
storing, centralized and decentralized stores, functions of stores.
DISPATCHING: Procedure, types, MIS systems for department and shop, bulletin 4
5 boards, move tickets, operation tickets, machine control boards, inspection ticket, time
ticket, communication systems for dispatching, follow up.
PLANT LAYOUT AND LOCATION: Plant layout: objectives, principles and types, 6
factors affecting plant layout, production line flow patterns, Plant location: factors
6
affecting the selection of location. Location of factory in small town, suburban areas,
location pattern of Indian industries.
NEW TRENDS IN OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT: Toyota Production System, 6
7 Just in Time manufacturing, Kanban, lean manufacturing systems, Total quality
management, Business process re-engineering, Logistics and supply chain management.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concepts of ‘Production planning & control’ and L2
aggregate production planning in Industries.
2 Apply the Routing, scheduling and sequencing techniques used in L3
industries.
3 Apply the concepts of storing and purchasing procedure in various L3
organizations.
4 Choose the Dispatching procedure used in various industries. L5
5 Design and develop the plant layouts using Design heuristics. L6
6 Analyze the concepts new trends in operations management like TPS, L4
JIT, TQM and SCM.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 1 1 2
CO4 1 1 1 2 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1
CO6 1 1 1 - 3 1 1 - - 2 3 1 1 2
 55

Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of

Publication/
Reprint
1. Industrial Engineering and Management, Hicks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 2003
2. Production Control, John F. Biegal, Prentice Hall of India, N.Delhi 1974
3. Modern Production/Operation Management, Buffa and Sarin, John Wiley and sons 2015
4. Industrial Engineering and Production Management, M. Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai and 2016
sons
5. Production & Operations Management, Surya Prakash Singh, Vikas publishing House 2018
Pvt.. Ltd., Noida

Course Name : SURFACE ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2018/ME4018
Credits : 4
L T P : 302

Course Objectives:
1 To impart the knowledge of Surface properties and their impact on performance of components.
To get familiar with the various techniques of surface treatment and characterizations of metallic
2
components.
To acquire the knowledge of various fields of applications for implementing the surface engineering to
3
improve the product performance.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Importance and necessity of surface engineering; past, present 5
and future scenario of surface engineering; Properties of Solid Surfaces: Tribological
1 and optical properties; Electric and opto-electronic properties, Importance and
objectives of surface properties, Corrosion of solid surfaces, Surface preparation
techniques.
WEAR AND CORROSION: Wear: Classification, Abrasive, Solid particle erosion, 8
Liquid erosion, Slurry erosion and adhesive wear; Fretting, Rolling-contact wear, wear
measurement; Corrosion: Types and conditions of corrosion, Electrochemical,
2
Uniform, Galvanic, Crevice, Inter-granular, Fretting and Erosion corrosions; Pitting,
Cavitation, Exfoliation, Stress-corrosion cracking, Corrosion fatigue, Hydrogen
embrittlement, corrosion measurement.
SURFACE TREATMENT TECHNIQUES: Selective surface hardening, Flame 10
hardening, Induction hardening, High-energy beam hardening, Laser melting and
3 curing, Shot peening, Friction stir processing; Chemical conversion treatment,
Diffusion heat treatment of surfaces, Carburizing, Nitriding, powder bed chemical case
hardening.
THIN FILM COATING: Organic and inorganic paintings, Ceramic coatings and 7
linings, Hot dip and electrochemical deposition, Thermal spray and vapour deposition,
4
Powder mixed electric discharge alloying and film deposition, Ion implantation and
metal alloying by laser beam.
CHARACTERIZATION OF ENGINEERED SURFACES: Characterization of 7
surface properties, Thickness of coatings and films, Bond strength of coating,
5
Substrate, Micro-hardness, Phase determination using X-Ray Diffraction (XRD)
analysis, Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM), Metallographic examination.
APPLICATIONS OF SURFACE ENGINEERING: Surface engineering for cutting 5
6 tools, automotive engine components, Gas turbine engines, Bio-Medical implants and
aerospace industry.
 56

Sr. List of Experiments Hours

No.
1 Wear and corrosion analysis of treated surface. 6
2 Thermal spray deposition of metal powder on surface of cylindrical work-piece. 6
3 Powder mixed EDM operation for surface alloying and analyzing the characteristics of 8
machined surfaces.
4 A case study and project work on mechanical treatment and surface modification of 8
metal components.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic surface properties and their importance towards the L2
performance of components and overall economics.
2 Interpret various types of wear and corrosion phenomenon occurring on L4
different types of materials.
3 Understand the facts and ideas on different types of surface modification and L2
coating techniques used in various fields of engineering.
4 Evaluate the surface texture and quality of surface modified by different L5
applied surface treatment techniques.
5 Apply surface modification techniques to modify the surface properties of L3
metallic components.
6 Design surface modification technique for better quality of surface L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 2 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - 1 2 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 1 - 1 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Introduction to Surface Engineering and Functionally Engineered Materials, Peter M. 2011
1
Martin, Wiley & Sons Publishing
2 Coating Technology Handbook, Arthur A. Traction, 3rd Edition, Taylor & Francis. 2006
Surface engineering for Corrosion and Wear Resistance, J.R. Davis & Associates, 2001
3
ASM International
4 Modern Surface Engineering Treatments, Mahmood Aliofkhazraei, Intechopen.com 2013

Course Name : ENGINEERING METALLURGY

Course Code : ME2019/ME4019
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge about the:

 57

Structure and properties of ferrous and non-ferrous metals that will definitely help to select the
1
materials for various engineering applications.
2 Heat treatment, testing and applications of metals and non-metallic materials
3 Phase-diagram, Iron-Carbon diagram and classifications of ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell tests, Impact test, IZOD and Charpy, fatigue and creep test, and
4
analysis of failure mechanisms.
No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS: Constitution of alloys, Solid solutions, 4
substitutional and interstitial, phase diagrams, Isomorphism, eutectic, eutectoid,
1
peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, Iron-carbon equilibrium diagram, Classification of
ferrous and non-ferrous metals, Cast-iron microstructure, properties and application.
FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS: Effect of alloying elements on 10
properties of steels, α and β stabilizers, stainless and tool steels, HSLA, OHNS, Grey,
white, malleable, nodular cast iron, spheroidal cast irons, Copper and copper alloys:
2
Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel, Al and Al-Cu, precipitation strengthening treatment,
white metal, bearing alloys, Mg-alloys, Ag and its alloys, Zn and its alloys, Ni-based
super alloys, Ni-Cr alloys, Inconel, monel, Titanium alloys, applications
HEAT TREATMENT: Definition, Normalizing, full and process annealing, 10
hardening, case hardening, nitiriding, carburizing, flame and induction hardening,
stress relieving, re-crystallization and spheroidising, tempering, Isothermal
3
transformation, cooling curves superimposed on I.T. diagram, CCR, Hardenability,
Jominy end quench test, Austempering, Martempering , Vacuum and Plasma
hardening.
NON-METALLIC MATERIALS: Polymers, types of polymer, commodity and 10
engineering polymers, Properties and applications of various thermosetting and
thermoplastic polymers (PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET,PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI, PPO, PPS,
4
PEEK, PTFE, Urea and Phenol formaldehydes), Engineering Ceramics - Properties
and applications of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON, Composites, Classifications,
Metal Matrix and FRP, Applications of Composites.
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND DEFORMATION MECHANISMS: 8
Mechanisms of plastic deformation, slip and twinning, Types of fracture, Testing of
5 materials under tension, compression and shear loads, Hardness tests, Relation among
Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell tests, Impact test, IZOD and Charpy, fatigue and creep
test, analysis of failure mechanisms.

Sr. List of Experiments No of

No. Hours
1 Preparation and study of crystal models for simple cubic, body centered cubic, 6
Face centered cubic and hexagonal close packed structured.
2 Preparation and study of the Microstructure of pure metals like Iron, Cu and Al. 4
3 Study of the Microstructure of Cast Irons and alloy steels. 6
4 Study of the Microstructure and hardness of Heat treated steels. 4
5 Hardenability of Steels by Jominy end quench test. 4
6 Behavior of ferrous and non-ferrous metals under creep and fatigue loading 4

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understanding the concept of alloys and phase diagram of different materials. L2
2 Analyse the effect of alloying element on properties and characteristics of L4
materials.
3 Apply the principle of heat treatment processes to modify the properties of L3
 58

different materials at solid state.

4 Compare and judge the material based on the knowledge of mechanism of L5
deformation, fracture and mechanical properties of different materials
5 Adapt non-metallic materials for industrial applications based on compile L6
information of properties and characterization.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 - - 1 - - - 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - 1 - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Avner, S.H., McGraw Hill Book Company. 1997
Material Science and Engineering, Williams D Callister, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised 2014
2
Indian Edition.
Engineering Materials, Kenneth G. Budinski and Michael K. Budinski, Prentice Hall 2010
3
of India Private Limited.
4 Materials Science and Engineering, Raghavan.V, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 2015
Materials Science and Engineering, Upadhyay. G.S. and Anish Upadhyay, Viva 2006
5
Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Course Name : PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

Course Code : ME2020/ME4020
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand the reverse engineering, redesign methodologies and theories.
2 Identify the significance of analytical and numerical techniques in product development engineering.
3 Understand about the physical models and concepts of product design theory.
Understand the principles in product development taking care with social, environmental and ethical
4
concerns.
Total No. of Lectures –42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Modern Product Development and Design Theories: 4
1 Understanding the opportunity, Development and Implementation of a concept,
Reverse engineering and redesign methodologies.
PRODUCT DESIGN PROCESS: Need, Identification, Kano diagram, Establishing 8
2 Engineering Characteristics, Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Product Design
Specification (PDS), Information Gathering.
CONCEPT GENERATION: Creative methods for design, Functional decomposition 10
3 and synthesis, Morphological methods, Theory of Inventive Problem solving,
Axiomatic Design.
 59

CONCEPT EVALUATION AND DECISION MAKING: Concept evaluation and 8

4 decision making: Decision Theory, Evaluation methods, Pugh’s concept, weighted
decision Matrix.
EMBODIMENT DESIGN: Product Architecture, Configuration and Parametric 6
5
Design Concepts, Ergonomics and Design for Environment and detailed design.
ETHICAL ISSUE AND TEAM MANAGEMENT: Ethical issues considered during 6
6 Engineering design process, Product liability, Tort law, functioning, discharge, Team
Dynamics and problem solving tools in design, Case studies.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understanding the principle and theories of Product Design and L2
Development.
2 Apply the concept of creative methods for generation and development of L3
product.
3 Analyse the engineering characteristics and quality function deployment for L4
gathering the information to develop new product.
4 Design the product architecture and configuration of new product. L6
5 Develop Ergonomics and consciousness for environmentally sustainable L6
manufacturing and product.
6 Judge and evaluate the methods and decision metrics to develop the product. L5

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engineering Design, George E Dieter, 3rd ed., McGraw Hill 2001
2 Product Design Kevin N. Otto, Kristin L. Wood, Pearson Education 2004
3 Engineering Design, Gahl, W Beitz J Feldhusun, K. G. Grote, 3rd ed., Springer. 2007
4 Design Engineering, W. Ernest Eder, S. Hosendl., CRC Press. 2008
Engineering Design and Rapid Prototyping, Ali K. Kamrani and EmadAbouel Nasr, 2010
5
Springer.

Course Name : COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Course Code : ME2021/ME4021
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge about the

 60

1. Matrix, interfaces, fibers, whiskers being used in fabrication of composites.

2. Polymer matrix composites, metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix composites, carbon-carbon
composites and their manufacturing.
3. Testing, properties and applications of different composite materials.
4. Post processing and micromechanics of composites.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 Composite: Definition, characteristics, functions, classification based on structure and
matrix, smart composites, advantages and limitations, industrial scene and applications, 7
Interfaces: wettability and bonding interface in composites, types of bonding at
interface. Fibers: types, natural, glass, boron, carbon, Ex-Pan carbon, Ex cellulose
carbon, Ex-Pitch carbon, and aramid fibers, fiber structure, properties, applications, and
recycling; Whiskers: characteristics, properties and applications.
2 Polymer matrix composites (PMC): Thermoset, thermoplastic and elastomeric
polymers, properties, characteristics and applications as matrix materials, processing of
polymer matrix composites: hand methods, Lay up method, spray up method, moulding 6
methods, pressure bagging and bag moulding methods, pultrusion and filament winding
process.
3 Metal matrix composites (MMC): Classification of metals, inter-metallic’s, alloys and
their potential role as matrices in composites; properties, characteristics and applications
of MMCs, production techniques: powder metallurgy, diffusion bonding, melt stirring, 6
squeeze casting, liquid infiltration under pressure, spray code position, in-situ process.
4 Ceramic matrix composites (CMC): Classification of ceramics and their potential
role as matrices; properties, characteristics and applications of CMC; Production
techniques: cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing, reaction bonding, hot pressing 7
and reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, pultrusion, lanxide process, in-situ chemical
technique, sol-gel technique, Post processing of CMC: machining, cutting, polishing,
welding, riveting, painting, and plasma coating.
5 Carbon Carbon Composites (CCC): Classification of carbon and their potential role
as matrices; Production techniques of CCC; Properties, characteristics and applications 4
of CCC.
6 Testing of Composites: Mechanical testing of composites, tensile and compressive
testing, Intra-laminar and Inter-laminar shear testing, Fracture testing; Stiffness and 5
Strength: Geometrical aspects-volume and weight fraction. Effect of unidirectional
continuous fiber, discontinuous fibers, short fiber, woven reinforcements on mechanical
properties.
7 Laminates: Types, Symmetric Laminates, Anti-symmetric Laminate, Balanced
Laminate, Quasi-isotropic Laminates, Cross-ply Laminate, Angle-ply Laminate.
Orthotropic Laminate, Volume and Mass Fractions, Density and Void Content, 7
Laminate Moduli, Approaches and Models of Four Elastic Moduli, Hygrothermal
Stresses. Strengths of unidirectional Lamina, Coefficients of thermal, moisture
expansion and Warpage of laminates.

Sr. List of Experiments Hours

No.
1 Fabrication of Al/SiC-MMC specimen 6
2 Fabrication of PMC by Layup method 6
3 Fabricate and prepare the MMC specimens as per standard size, perform tensile and 8
compressive tests, and analyze the test results
4 A project work on machining and joining of CMC materials 8

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

 61

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the mechanical behavior of layered composites compared to L2
isotropic materials.
2 Design and develop the process to fabricate different types of composite L6
materials.
3 Evaluate the mechanical properties and strength of composite materials. L5
4 Select and apply the process to develop composites, and apply constitutive L3
equations to acquire the knowledge mechanical behavior at micro, macro and
meso level.
5 Analyze the mechanical behavior of composites due to variation in L4
temperature and moisture.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Composite Materials: Science and Engineering, K. K. Chawla, Springer, 3e, 2013
2 Composite Materials, Engineering and Sciences, F.L.Matthews & R.D.Rawlings, 1994
Chapman & hall, London,
3 Hand Book of Composites, George Lubin. Van Nostrand, Reinhold Co. 1982
4 Fiber-reinforced composites, P.K.Mallicak, Monal Deklar Inc., New York, 1988 1988
5 Principles of Composite Mechanics, R.F. Gibson, 2nd Ed., CRC Press. 2007

Course Name : FLUID MECHANICS

Course Code : ME2022/ME4022
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concept of fluid mechanics.
2 To understand statics, dynamics and various approaches to fluid mechanics.
3 To correlate fundamentals of fluid mechanics with various mechanical systems
4 To model and solve the problem on a commercial software/open source platform.
Total No. of Lectures –42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
Introduction: Basic Concepts and Definitions, Properties of Fluid, Viscosity, Capillarity, 3
1
Surface Tension, Compressibility, Normal and Shear Stresses in Fluid Flows.
Fluid Statics: Types of Forces on Fluid Element, Mechanics of Fluid at Rest and in Rigid 4
2 Body Motion, Manometry, Hydrostatic Forces on Fully and Partially Submerged Bodies,
Stability of a Floating Body.
3 Kinematics of Fluid Flow: Langrangian and Eulerian Methods, Description of Properties 6
 62

in a Moving Fluid, Local and Convective Acceleration, Streamlines, Path Lines, Streak
Lines, Acceleration and Rotation of a Fluid Particle, Vorticity and Circulation, Stream
Function, Frictionless and Irrotational Flow, Velocity Potential Function.
Dynamics of Fluid Flow: Basic Physical Laws of Fluid Mechanics, The Reynolds 6
Transport Theorem, Equation of Conservation of Mass, Differential Form of Continuity
4 Equation, Navier-Stokes Equations, Euler’s Equation of Motion, Frictionless Flow -
Bernoulli’s Equation, Angular Momentum Theorem, Applications to Flow Measurement
and other Real Flow Problems.
Viscous Flow: Regimes of Flow, Pressure Gradient in Steady Uniform Flow, Qualitative 6
Aspects of Viscous Flows, Exact solutions of Navier-Stokes Equations, Laminar Flow
5
Through a Pipe - Hagen-Poiseulli’s Flow, Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow,
Turbulent Flow Through a Pipe, Friction Factor, Applications to Pipe Networks.
Flow Past Immersed Bodies: Reynolds Number and Geometry Effects, Momentum 6
Integral Estimates, Boundary Layer (BL) Equations, Flow Over a Flat-Plate, Boundary
6
Layers with Pressure Gradients, Laminar and Turbulent BL, Separation of BL and Control
of Flow Separation, Streamlined and Bluff Body.
Introduction to CFD: Need of Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD), Solving Partial 7
and Ordinary Differential Equations: Brief Introduction to Numerical Methods (FDM,
FVM, and FEM), Need of Discretization, Meshing Requirements in Laminar and
7
Turbulent Flows, Boundary Conditions, Solution Techniques, and Convergence Criterion.
Modelling/Solving Some Basic Fluid Flow Problems on a Commercial Software/ Open
Source Platform and Post-Processing.
Dimensional Analysis and Similitude: Buckingham’s Theorem, Non-Dimensional 4
8 Groups, Geometric, Kinematic and Dynamic Similarity, Modeling of Fluid Flows,
Applications.

List of Experiments: No. of Turns

1 To determine the metacentric height of a given vessel under unloaded condition. 1
2 Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem and measurement of velocity using Pitot tube. 1
3 To determine the Coefficient of discharge through Venturi meter and Orifice meter. 1
4 To determine the different types of flow Patterns by Reynolds’s experiment. 1
5 To determine the Friction factor and loss coefficients for the different pipes. 1
6 To model a simple fluid flow problem on a commercial software/open source 2
platform and post-processing the data.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic concept of fluid mechanics. L2
2 Apply the principles of fluid statics and dynamics to real life problems. L3
3 Correlate and implement the fundamentals of fluid mechanics to analyze L4
simple hydrodynamics systems.
4 Examine the basic fluid flow problems through analytical and numerical L5
(commercial/open source) tools.
5 Introduction to the concept of boundary layer and its implementation to solve L4
practical fluid flow problems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 3
 63

CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Fluid Mechanics by Frank .M. White, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. 2017
2 Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering by D.S. Kumar, S.K.Kataria & Sons 2013
3 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publications 2018
th
4 Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics by Munson, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 7 edition 2015
Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Yunus A. Cengel, John M. 2019
5
Cimbala, McGraw Hill Education; 4th edition

Course Name : INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES

Course Code : ME2023/ME4023
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: Students will learn about

1 The basic cycles of operation of internal combustion engines.
2 Basic configuration of I.C. engines and its different parts.
3 Different sub-systems of IC engines.
The design/operating characteristics of different types of internal combustion engines which affect its
4
performance.
5 Recent developments in the field of IC engine fuels and other non-conventional engines.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Heat Engines, Internal and external combustion engines, 4
classification of I.C. Engines, Cycles of operation in 4 stroke /2stroke /SI/CI engines,
1
Valve timings diagram, low speed and high-speed engines, Rotary /Wankel Engines,
Applications, Performance parameters.
WORKING CYCLES: Air standard cycles: assumptions, Otto, Diesel and Dual 4
cycles, efficiency, M.E.P. & their comparison. Fuel Air Cycles: effect of dissociation
2
and operating variables, comparison of air standard and fuel-air cycles. Actual Cycles,
losses, comparison with air standard cycles.
IC ENGINES’ SYSTEMS: Carburetion System: definition, Air-Fuel ratio, simple 9
carburetor, essential parts of carburetor, compensating devices. Fuel Injection Systems:
classification, parts of mechanical fuel injection systems and brief study of electronic
injection systems. Ignition Systems: energy requirement, Battery/ Magneto/ Modern
3 ignition systems, i.e., TCI and CDI systems, Ignition timing and firing order, Spark
advance mechanism. Cooling and Lubrication Systems: wet, mist and dry sump
lubrication systems, Factors affecting mechanical friction, Lube properties SAE rating,
necessity of cooling, parameters affecting engine heat transfer, air and water cooling,
Radiators
COMBUSTION IN I.C. ENGINES: Homogeneous/Heterogeneous mixtures, stages 8
of combustion in S.I. Engines, velocity of flame propagation; detonation, effects of
4 engine variables on detonation; theories of detonation, pre-ignition, S.I. engine
combustion chambers. Stages of combustion in C.I. Engines; delay period; variables
affecting delay period; knock in C.I. engines, C.I. engine combustion chambers.
ENGINE EMMISSION AND CONTROL: Pollution due to IC Engines, Exhaust 4
5
Emissions -Hydrocarbons, Carbon Monoxide, Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Other
 64

Emissions. Controls: Thermal Converters, Catalytic Converters, Particulate Traps,

Chemical Methods, Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR), Evaporation Control Device,
Crankcase Blow-by.
ENGINE TESTING AND PERFORMANCE: Measurement of Power, Fuel/ Air 5
Consumption, Speed etc. Performance Parameters: BHP, IHP, FHP, Mechanical,
6
Indicated and Brake Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressure, Charging
Efficiency, Volumetric Efficiency, bsfc, isfc, Heat Balance Sheet, Performance Curves
SPECIAL TOPICS: Supercharging, Variable Compression Ratio (VCR) Engine, Two 8
stroke engines, Common Rail Direct Injection (CRDI) Engines, Dual fuel /multi-fuel
7 engines, Homogeneous charge compression ignition (HCCI) engine, Wankel Engine,
Stratified Charge engines, Alternate fuels for IC engines, Hybrid Electric Propulsive
System, Comparison of automatic propulsion system.

S. Course Outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Bloom Level)
1. Identify and rationally choose the appropriate type of I.C. Engine(s) for a L2
particular application.
2. Apply the basic concepts to select the different subsystems of an IC engine. L3
3. Analyze the performance of engines at different operating parameters. L4
4. Analyze and justify the suitability of conventional and non-conventional fuel L4
for existing and futuristic IC engines.
5. Select and modify the combustion system integrals to minimize pollution L5 & L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 - - - - 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - 3 - - - - 2 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Internal Combustion Engines, V Ganeshan, 4th ed., Mc Graw Hill 2017
2 Internal Combustion Engines, M.L. Mathur and R.P. Sharma, Dhanpat Rai Publication 2010
Engineering Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines, Willard W. Pulkrabek,
3 2007
Pearson
4 Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals, John B. Heywood, Mcgraw Hill Science 2017
Internal Combustion Engines Applied Thermo-sciences, Colin R. Ferguson, Allan T.
5 2015
Kirkpatrick, 3rd ed., Wiley, Student Edition

Course Name : COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

Course Code : ME2024/ME4024
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand mathematical characteristics of partial differential equations.
2 To understand basic properties of computational methods.
 65

To learn computational solution techniques for time integration of ordinary and partial differential
3
equations.
4 To learn to solve computationally the Euler and Navier-Stokes equations
To acquire basic programming and graphic skills to conduct the flow field calculations and data
5
analysis.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1. INTRODUCTION: CFD and its Applications, Numerical vs Analytical vs 4
Experimental approach, Modeling Vs Experimentation, Fundamental principles of
conservation, Reynolds transport theorem, Principles of mass, momentum and
energy conservation, General scalar transport equation.
2. PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND PHYSICAL BEHAVIOUR: 2
Mathematical classification of Partial Differential Equation, Illustrative examples of
elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic equations, Applications of elliptic, parabolic and
hyperbolic partial differential equations
3 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS: Error Minimization Principles, 3
Functional involving higher order derivatives, Approximate solution of differential
equations through variational formulation, Boundary conditions in the variational
form: Primary and secondary variables, Essential and natural boundary conditions,
Approximate solutions of differential equations.
4 FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCRETIZATION: Pre-processing, Solution, Post- 6
processing, Finite difference method (FDM), Well posed boundary value problem,
Possible types of boundary conditions, Conservativeness, Boundedness,
Transportiveness, Finite volume method (FVM), Illustrative examples:1-D steady
state heat conduction without and with constant source term. 1-D unsteady state
diffusion problems: implicit, fully explicit and Crank-Nicholson scheme. The basic
structure of a CFD code: Pre-processor, Solver and Post-processor, User-defined-
subroutines, Solution to some basic problems in heat transfer and fluid flow.
5 FINITE VOLUME METHOD: Concepts and Illustrations through 1-D Steady 14
State Diffusion Problems: Physical consistency, Overall balance, FV Discretization
of a 1-D steady state diffusion-based problem, Composite material with position
dependent thermal conductivity, Source term linearization, Implementation of
boundary conditions. FVM for 2-D unsteady state diffusion problems. Finite volume
discretization of convection-diffusion problem: Central difference scheme, Upwind
scheme, Exponential scheme and Hybrid scheme, Power law scheme, Generalized
convection-diffusion formulation, Finite volume discretization of two-dimensional
convection-diffusion problem, The concept of false diffusion, QUICK scheme.
Stream Function-Vorticity approach and Primitive variable approach, Staggered grid
and Collocated grid, SIMPLE Algorithm, SIMPLER Algorithm.
6 DISCRETIZATION OF TIME DEPENDENT DIFFUSION TYPE 7
PROBLEMS: Consequences of time-discretization in finite discretization,
Consistency, Stability, Convergence, LAX Equivalence theorem, Grid independent
and time independent study, Stability analysis of parabolic equations (1-D unsteady
state diffusion problems): Forward time central space (FTCS) scheme, Stability
analysis of parabolic equations (1-Dunsteady state diffusion problems): Central time
central space (CTCS) scheme (Leap frog scheme), Dufort-Frankel scheme, Stability
analysis of hyperbolic equations: FTCS, FTFS, FTBS and CTCS Schemes, Stability
analysis of 2nd order hyperbolic equations: CTCS scheme.
7 LINEAR ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS: Criteria for unique solution, infinite 6
 66

number of solutions and no solution, Solution techniques for systems of linear

algebraic equations: L-U decomposition technique, Tridiagonal matrix algorithm
(TDMA): Thomas algorithm, Illustrative examples, Iteration methods: Jacobi’s
method and Gauss Siedel method, Illustrative examples of Jacobi’s method and
Gauss-Siedel method, ADI (Alternating direction implicit) method.

No. of
List of Experiments
Hours
1 Ansys Simulation of lid driven cavity. 4
2 Ansys Simulation of heat transfer and fluid flow through pipe. 4
3 Ansys Simulation of flow past regular and irregular bodies. 4
4 Ansys Simulation of Conduction, Convection and Radiation 4
5 Ansys Simulation of flow through porous media. 6
6 Ansys Simulation of Phase Change Materials 6

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the use and stepwise procedure to completely solve a fluid flow L1, L2
and heat transfer problem using computational methods.
2 Develop basic governing equations for fluid flow and heat transfer by L3
examining the physical boundary conditions.
3 Construct and Analyze the consistency, stability and convergence of various L4, L6
discretization schemes of finite difference based equations according to the
nature (i.e. elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic) of the flow problem.
4 Predict and implement various implicit and explicit CFD schemes to solve L3, L5
steady and unsteady 1/2/3 dimensional fluid and heat transfer problems.
5 Analyze and evaluate various finite volume based CFD schemes to solve L3, L5
fluid and heat transfer problems.
6 Practice CFD software to simulate practical fluid flow and heat transfer L3
problems

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO6 2 2 2 2 3 - - - - 3 - 2 2 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, S. V. Patankar, McGraw-Hill. 2018
2 Computational Fluid Dynamics, T. J. Chung, Cambridge University Press. 2010
An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, H. K. Versteeg & W. Malalasekera, 2007
3
2nded. Longman Scientific &Technical
Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics, J. H. Ferziger and M. Peric, 3rd ed. 2002
4
Springer
 67

Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer, John C. Tannehill, Dale A. 2016
5
Anderson and Richard H. Pletcher, 3rd ed., Taylor & Francis
6 Computational Fluid Dynamics, John D. Anderson Jr, McGraw Hill Book Company 2017
7 Computational Fluid Dynamics: Principles and Applications, J. Blazek, 3rd ed. Elsevier. 2015

Course Name : HYDRAULIC MACHINES

Course Code : ME2025/ME4025
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
1 Understand the basic principles of Hydraulic Machines.
2 To review the development of Hydel power plants and its eco-system.
3 Understand the working and design of hydraulic turbines and hydraulic pumps.
4 Basic understanding of various hydraulic systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
HYDRO-ELECTRIC DEVELOPMENT: Development of water turbines, Types of
1 water wheels, components of hydropower plant. Types of hydroelectric power plant. 3
Types of turbine losses and efficiencies in hydraulic turbines.
PRINCIPLES OF HYDRAULIC MACHINES: Impulse Momentum equation,
Impact of Jets Force on Stationery Plates, Force on moving plates force on series of
2 4
vanes. Euler Equation for hydraulic machines, Degree of Reaction, Vortex motion and
flow in turbine.
HYDRAULIC IMPULSE TURBINES: Components of Pelton Turbines, Dimension
3 of bucket of Pelton turbine, Number of buckets Diameter of jets, speed ratio jet ratio, 4
no. of jets, Energy conversion in Pelton turbines.
HYDRAULIC REACTION TURBINE: Evolution of Reaction turbines, Francis
Turbine Draft tube, power losses and efficiencies of Francis turbine, Francis turbine
4 proportions outward Vs inward flow reaction turbine. Axial flow turbines. 7
Components of an axial flow turbine blade. Performance at part loads. Adjustment of
Kaplan turbine, Kaplan turbine proportions Application of aerofoil theory.
GOVERNING OF HYDRAULIC TURBINES: Necessity of governing of hydraulic
turbines, Requirements of a good governing system in hydraulic turbines, Essential
5 3
elements of governing system, double regulation of turbines governing of Impulse
turbines, governing mechanism of impulse and reaction turbines
PERFORMANCE OF HYDRAULIC TURBINES: Unit quantities, specific speed,
6 characteristics of turbine, Types of characteristic curve, constant head characteristics, 3
constant speed characteristics and instant efficiency or Muschel curve.
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS: Classification of centrifugal pumps, components of
centrifugal pump, working of centrifugal pump, Heads of pumps, Energy Conversion
in centrifugal pump, variation of Euler’s head with vane shapes. Effect of finite no. of
7 7
vanes on Euler’s head, losses and efficiencies, Minimum starting speed, Net positive
suction head, Multi stage pumps, Pumps in parallel and series primary devices, concept
of specific speed and performance of centrifugal pump Cavitation in Hydraulic pumps.
RECIPROCATING PUMP: Components and working of reciprocating pump,
classification of reciprocating pump, Discharge through reciprocating pump, slip,
Power input, Indicator diagram Effect of piston acceleration head on indicator diagram,
8 6
Maximum speed of reciprocating pump, Arrangement of delivery pipe in reciprocating
pump, air vessels, pressure head in cylinder with Air vessels during suction and
delivery stroke, Maximum speed with air vessels comparison with centrifugal and
 68

Reciprocating pump
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS AND MACHINES: Hydraulic system, Hydraulic
accumulator, Hydraulic intensifier, Hydraulic Jigger, Hydraulic left Hydraulic Crane,
9 5
Hydraulic Press, Hydraulic coupling Hydraulic Torque converter, Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic Ram, Air lift pump, jet pump.

No. of
List of Experiments:
Turns
1 To determine the characteristics curve of a Pelton wheel. 1
2 To determine the characteristics curve of a Francis turbine. 2
3 To determine the characteristics curve of a centrifugal pump. 2
4 To obtain the efficiency of a reciprocating pump under various heads. 1
5 To study the hydraulic ram and determine its efficiency. 1

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recognize the basic fluid machineries and their components. L2
2 Apply the basic principles of hydraulic machines. L3
3 Analyze the performance of hydraulic machines. L4
4 Determine the performance characteristics curves of hydraulic L5
machines.
5 Investigate and optimize the design parameters of hydraulic systems. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Hydraulic Machines by T.R. Banga and S. Sharma, Khanna Publisher 1995
2 Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines, SS Ratta, Khanna Publisher 2019
3 Theory and Design of Hydraulic Machines, V.P. Vasandani, Khanna Publisher. 1990
4 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, R.K. Rajput, S. Chand publisher. 2016

Course Name : CONVECTIVE HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

Course Code : ME2026/ME4026
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand basic principles of free and forced convection heat transfer processes.
2 To be able to formulate and solve convective heat transfer problems.
3 To be able to evaluate energy requirements for operating a flow system.
 69

4 To understand the mass transfer processes.

Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Basics of thermodynamics, Fluid mechanics and heat transfer, 4
1 Continuity, momentum and energy equations, Reynolds transport theorem, Rules of
scale analysis, Concept of heat line visualization.
LAMINAR FORCED CONVECTION - EXTERNAL FLOWS: Boundary layer 9
concept, velocity and thermal boundary layer, Governing equations, Similarity
2
solutions, Various wall heating conditions, Flow over sphere, wedge and stagnation
flow.
LAMINAR FORCED CONVECTION - INTERNAL FLOWS: Fully developed 5
laminar flow: Constant heat flux, Constant wall temperature, Mean temperature, Fully
3
developed temperature and velocity profile, Thermally developing flow and thermal-
hydraulical developing flow.
EXTERNAL NATURAL CONVECTION: Governing equations for natural 7
convection, Boussinesq approximation, Dimensional analysis, Boundary layer
4
equations, Scale analysis, Low and high Prandtl number fluids, Combined natural and
forced convection.
INTERNAL NATURAL CONVECTION: Scaling analysis, Natural convection in 6
5 enclosures: Isothermal and constant heat flux, Side-walls and triangular enclosures,
Heated from below, Inclined enclosures, Annular space between horizontal cylinders.
TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYER FLOW: Transaction to turbulent flow, 6
Turbulent flow and its characteristics, Boundary layer equations, Mixing length model,
6
Flow over a single cylinder, Cross-flow over array of cylinders, Natural convection
along vertical walls, Turbulent duct flow and Free turbulent flows.
MASS TRANSFER: Introduction to mass transfer, Concentrations, velocities and 5
mass fluxes, Governing equations of mass transfer: Species mass balance, constitutive
7
equations, Boundary conditions, Heat and mass transfer analogy, Impermeable surface
model, Mass transfer driven flows and Simultaneous heat and mass transfer.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Revisit the basics of thermodynamics, heat transfer and fluid L2
mechanics.
2 Apply the concepts of convective heat transfer to solve the problems of L3
theoretical and practical interest.
3 Analyze thermo-hydrodynamics of internal and external, laminar and L4
turbulent, and natural and forced convection flows.
4 Optimize, evaluate, and design the convective heat transport based L5 & L6
thermal systems.
5 Analysis and application of mass transport principles to cooling tower, L4
condensers, and humidifier/dehumidifier.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2
 70

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Convection Heat Transfer, A. Bejan, John Willey and Sons, New York. 2001
2 Convective Heat Transfer, Louis, C. Burmeister, John Willey and Sons, New York. 2003
3 Convective Heat and Mass Transfer, Kays and Crawford, 4th Ed., McGraw Hill. 2017
Convective Heat and Mass Transfer, S. Mostafa Ghiaasiaan, South Asian Edition,
4 2014
Cambridge India
Fundamentals of Convective Heat Transfer, Gautam Biswas, Amaresh Dalal, Vijay K.
5 2019
Dhir, 1st ed., CRC Press.

Course Name : TWO-PHASE FLOW HEAT TRANSFER

Course Code : ME2027/ME4027
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the phenomena occurring at micro and nano scale.
2 To understand the basic mechanisms involved in two phase flow and heat transfer.
3 To understand the concepts of pool boiling and flow boiling heat transfer
4 To introduce the film wise and drop wise mode of condensation.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
LIQUID-VAPOR INTERFACIAL REGION: Molecular Perspective on Liquid- 6
Vapor Transitions, Molecular Theories of Capillarity, Nano-scale Features of the
1 Interfacial Region, Interfacial Tension Effects: Determination of Interface Shapes,
Effect of Temperature and Surfactant Effects, Near Critical Point Behavior and Effects
of Interfacial Tension Gradients.
WETTING PHENOMENA AND CONTACT ANGLES: Equilibrium Contact 5
Angles, Wettability, Cohesion and Adhesion, Effect of Surface Tension on Contact
2
Angle, Adsorption and Spread Thin Films, Contact-Angle Hysteresis, Wettability of
Micro-structured and Nano-structured Surfaces.
HOMOGENEOUS NUCLEATION: Thermodynamic Aspects of Homogeneous 4
3 Nucleation in Superheated and Super-cooled Liquids, Kinetic Limit of Superheat and
Super-saturation, Effect of Wall Interaction.
HETEROGENEOUS NUCLEATION AND BUBBLE GROWTH: Heterogeneous 5
Nucleation at a Smooth Interface, Nucleation from Entrapped Gas or Vapor in
4 Cavities, Criteria for the Onset of Nucleate Boiling, Bubble Growth in an Extensive
Liquid Pool, Bubble Growth Near Heated Surfaces, Bubble Departure Diameter and
Frequency of Bubble Release.
POOL BOILING: Regimes of Pool Boiling, Mechanisms and Models of Transport 7
during Nucleate Boiling, Correlation of Nucleate Boiling Heat Transfer Data,
Limitations of Nucleate Boiling Processes and the Maximum Heat Flux Transition,
5
Minimum Heat Flux Conditions, Film Boiling, Transition Boiling, Leiden frost
Phenomenon, Fluid-Wall Interactions and Disjoining Pressure Effects and Pool Boiling
Heat Transfer on Micro and Nano Structured Surfaces.
TWO-PHASE FLOW REGIMES: Basic Models and Governing Equations for One- 7
6 Dimensional Two-Phase Flows, Determination of the Two-Phase Multiplier and Void
Fraction, Analytical Models of Annular Flow, Effects of Flow Passage Size and
 71

Geometry.
FLOW BOILING: Regimes of Convective Boiling in Conventional (Macro) Tubes, 4
Onset of Boiling in Internal Flows, Sub-cooled Flow Boiling, Saturated Flow Boiling,
7
Critical Heat Flux Conditions, Post-CHF Internal Flow Boiling, Flow Boiling in
Micro-Channels.
CONDENSATION: Nusselt theory: Importance, Limitations and Modifications, Film 4
Condensation on a Flat Vertical Surface, Effects of Vapor Motion, Interfacial Waves
8
and Non-condensable Gases, Heterogeneous Nucleation in Vapors, Drop wise
Condensation: Surface Requirements, Fundamentals and Recent Advancements.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Identify the important forces and their characteristics at small scale. L2
2 Apply the basics of two-phase heat transfer processes on simple and complex L3
systems.
3 Examine the performance of two-phase heat transfer systems. L4
4 Select the suitable phase-change heat transfer process and evaluate the L5
important process parameters for practical applications.
5 Design heat transport systems for boiling and condensation heat transfer. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Liquid-Vapor Phase-Change Phenomena: An Introduction to the Thermo physics of
1 Vaporization and Condensation Processes in Heat Transfer Equipment, Van P. Carey, 2020
3rd Edition, CRC Press.
2 Convective Boiling and Condensation, J.G. Collier, Clarendon Press. 1996
Boiling Heat Transfer and Two-phase Flow, L. S. Tong, and Y.S. Tang, 1st ed., 2018
3
Rutledge.
Encyclopedia of Two-phase Heat Transfer and Flow, John R Thome, A 4-volume Set,
4 2018
World Scientific.

Course Name : AUTOMOTIVE COMBUSTION AND EMISSIONS

Course Code : ME2028/ME4028
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basics of combustion.
2 To acquire the knowledge of stages of combustion in IC engine.
3 To acquire the knowledge of kinetics of combustion used particularly in combustion chamber design.
 72

4 To understand the formation of pollutants and its mitigation principles

Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Engine Combustion and Emissions 2
THERMODYNAMICS OF COMBUSTION: Combustion Stoichiometry, Heat of 5
Reaction, Enthalpy of Formation, Adiabatic Flame Temperature, Equilibrium
2
Combustion Products, Unburned Mixtures, Low Temperature Combustion Products,
High Temperature Combustion Products, Chemical Kinetics
COMBUSTION IN SI ENGINES: Premixed Charge Combustion, SI Engine 6
Combustion Conceptual Models, Combustion Rate Characterization, Thermodynamics
3
Analysis of Combustion, Cycle-To-Cycle Combustion Variations, Knocking
Combustion
COMBUSTION IN CI ENGINES: Fuel Injection and Spray Structure, CI Engine 4
4 Combustion Conceptual Models, Diesel Combustion Process Characterization,
Thermodynamic Analysis
ENGINE COMBUSTION SYSTEMS: Fluid Motion in Engine Cylinder, Valve 6
Arrangement and Variable Valve Actuation, Classification of Engine Combustion
5 Systems, Premixed Homogeneous Charge SI Engines, Direct Injection Stratified
Charge Engines, Heterogeneous Charge CI Engines, HCCI/CAI Engines, Engine
Management and Sensors, Laser diagnostic and optical measurement.
FORMATION OF ENGINE EMISSIONS: Emission effect on health and 5
environment, sources of engine emissions, formation of carbon monoxide, NO
6 formation, unburned hydrocarbon emissions, soot and particulate formation, diesel
NOx - particulate trade off, effect of SI engine design and operating variables, effect of
diesel engine design and operating variables.
EMISSION STANDARDS AND MEASUREMENT: Emission Standards, Emission 2
7 Test Cycles, Emission Measurement: Instrumentation and Methods, Euro/Bharat Stage
norms.
EMISSION CONTROL TECHNOLOGY: SI Engine -Design Parameters, Add-On 6
Systems for Treatment of Emissions Within Engine, Exhaust After-treatment, Direct
Injection Stratified Charge (DISC) Engines, Summary of SI Engine Emission Control.
8
CI Engine - Design Parameters, Application of EGR in CI Engines, Exhaust After-
treatment in Diesel Engines, Summary of Diesel Emission Control, HCCI Engines for
Emission Control.
ENGINE FUELS AND EMISSIONS: Common Hydrocarbon Components, General 6
Fuel Quality Requirements, Motor Gasoline, Diesel Fuels, Alternative Fuels, antiknock
9 fuels, Alcohols, Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Biodiesel, Gas-to-Liquid
(GTL) Fuels, Dimethyl Ether (DME), Hydrogen, Greenhouse Gas Emissions, various
fuel additives

S. No. Course Objectives Knowledge Level

By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
(Bloom Level)
1 Apply the basic concepts of combustion in automotive engine L2
combustion, and understand the emission standards. L3
2 Interpret the process of combustion in automotive engines. L3
3 Analyze and examine the combustion process, and measurement L4 & L5
techniques, and challenges.
4 Select the suitable fuel for the current and future needs of the society. L5
5 Design the engines to minimize the emissions with suitable control L6
strategies.
 73

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - - - 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals, John B. Heywood, McGraw Hill Science 2000
Combustion and Emissions in IC Engines, Murari Mohan Roy (Published
2 2019
Independently with Amazon)
Internal Combustion Engines: Performance, Fuel Economy and Emissions, IMechE,
3 2013
London, Elsevier.
4 IC Engines: Combustion and emissions, B P Pundir, Alpha Sciences. 2010

Course Name : THERMAL SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION

Course Code : ME2029/ME4029
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
To understand the significance of modelling and simulation of different engineering problems using
1
various techniques.
To understand various mathematical techniques in solution of variety of problems related to design
2
and optimization of Thermal Systems.
To understand the application of software for modelling, simulation and optimization of engineering
3
systems problems.
4 To design and analyze of industrial equipment’s and hydraulic systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO THERMAL DESIGN: Design, Mathematical Modelling and
Numerical Simulation of Thermal Systems, Approach to Robust Design, Numerical
1 07
Methods for thermal and energy systems, Closed form solutions of heat transfer
problems, Finite Difference and Finite Volume Formulations, TDMA Method
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THERMAL EQUIPMENT: Design Strategies,
Design of Heat Exchanger, Refrigeration System, Solar Thermal System, Heat Pump,
2 07
Cooling of Electronic Components, Energy Storage System and Design Consideration
for Engineering Material Selection.
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Introduction to Hydraulic
3 Systems, Constituents of Hydraulic System, Directional Control Valve, Pressure 07
Control Valve and Flow Control Valve, Hydraulic Circuit Design and Analysis.
OPTIMIZATION: Basic Concepts, Objective Function, Methods, Optimization of
4 Mechanical System and case studies, Practical Aspects in Optimal Design, Constrained 07
and Unconstrained Problems: Langrage Multiplier, Geometric & Dynamic
 74

Programming based optimization.

THERMAL SYSTEM SIMULATION: Simulation of Periodic Heat Transfer,
5 Laminar and Turbulent Convection, Compressible Flow in Nozzle, Cavitation and 07
Solidification, Flow Past a Cylinder, Flat Plate Boundary Layer.
ECONOMIC AND EXERGO-ECONOMIC ANALYSIS: Estimation of Total
Capital Investment, Principal of Economic Evaluation, Calculation of Revenue
6 Requirements, Levelized Cost Rates, Cost Rate of Exergy Destruction, Exergy 07
Destruction, Percentage Relative Cost Difference, Total Operating Cost Rate and
Exergo-economic Factor.

Experiments:
Thermal system modelling and simulation experiments on Heat Exchanger, refrigeration 14
system, hydraulic system, solar energy, energy storage etc. will be performed using ANSYS
Fluent /CFX, COMSOL etc.

Sr. Course Outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 To have knowledge of different aspects of designing of a thermal system. L1, L3
2 To identify and examine a design problem associated to a thermal system. L4
3 To integrate thermal component models and simulate a thermal system. L6
To design, formulate analysis and solve engineering problems using
4 L7
knowledge of various disciplines.
To inculcate an ability to identify, formulates, and solves engineering
5 L2, L5
problems using mathematical techniques.
To perform technoeconomic analysis of thermal system using commercial
6 L3
software techniques.
7 To communicate thermal system designs both orally and in writing. L6
To understand some of the ethical and societal issues associated with
8 L4
design and optimization of thermal system.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 - 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 - - - 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 - - - - 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 - - - - 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3
CO6 1 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 1 3
CO7 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 3 1 3
CO8 3 - 2 - - - - 1 1 1 - - 1 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Design and Optimization of Thermal System with MATLAB Applications, Y Jaluria,
1 2020
3rd ed., CRC Press.
2 Heat Transfer, Cengel and Boles, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 2002
Thermal Design and Optimization, A Bejan, G. Satsoranis and M Moran, 2nd ed.,
3 1996
Wiley Inderscience.
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Versteeg and Malalasekhera, 1st ed., Longman
4 2007
Scientific & Technical.
 75

Course Name : DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEM

Course Code : ME2030/ME4030
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
To provide the knowledge of various mathematical techniques used in design and optimization of
1
thermal systems.
2 To model and simulate the different thermal engineering problems.
To give an insight of a commercial software for modelling, simulation and optimization of the thermal
3
systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
ENGINEERING DESIGN: Design versus Analysis, Design versus Synthesis,
Selection versus Design, Design as part of Engineering Enterprises, Basic
1 Characteristics of Thermal System, Basic Consideration in Design, Conceptual Design, 07
Basic steps in design process, Computer Aided Design of Thermal System, Material
Properties and Selection for Thermal System.
MODELING OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Introduction, Types of Model,
Mathematical Modeling, Physical Modeling and Dimensional Analysis, Importance of
2 07
Modeling in Design, Basic Features of Modeling, Type of Models, General procedure
of mathematical modeling, physical modeling and dimensional analysis.
NUMERICAL MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Numerical Model, Solution
3 Procedure, Numerical Model of a System, System Simulation, Methods of Numerical 07
Simulation.
ACCEPTABLE DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Initial Design, Design
Strategies, Design of System in different application areas such as manufacturing,
4 07
electronics, environment, heat transfer and fluid flow, Additional Considerations in
Large Practical Systems.
PROBLEM FORMULATION FOR OPTIMIZATION: Introduction to
Optimization in Design, Basic Concepts, Optimization methods, Important
5 07
Considerations for Optimization of Thermal System, Different Types of Thermal
System, Practical Aspects of Thermal Design.
THERMAL SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION USING COMMERCIAL
SOFTWARE: Modelling Periodic Flow and Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow
6 Convection, Turbulent Forced Convection, Compressible Flow in Nozzle, Modelling 07
Cavitation, Solidification and Steady and Unsteady Flow Past a Cylinder, Flat Plate
Boundary Layer.

Course Outcome Knowledge Level

Sr. No.
By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 To have knowledge of different aspects of designing of a thermal system. L1, L3
2 To identify and examine a design problem associated to a thermal system. L4
3 To have understand basics of modeling and their associated techniques. L6
To inculcate an ability to solve engineering problems using knowledge of
4 L7
various disciplines.
To inculcate an ability to identify, formulates, and solves engineering
5 L2, L5
problems.
Top inculcate an ability to use the mathematical tools for optimization of
6 L3
engineering problems.
 76

To design, formulate analysis and solve engineering problems using

7 L6
mathematical as well as commercial software tools.
To explain economic and exergoeconomic aspect associated with
8 L4
designing and optimization of thermal system.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 - 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 - - - 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 - - - - 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 - - - - 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3
CO6 1 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 1 3
CO7 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 3 1 3
CO8 3 - 2 - - - - 1 1 1 - - 1 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Design and Optimization of Thermal System, Y Jaluria, 2nd ed., CRC Press. 2020
2 Heat Transfer, Cengel and Boles, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 2002
Thermal Design and Optimization, A Bejan, G Satsoranis and M Moran, 2nd ed.,
3 1996
Wiley Inderscience.
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Versteeg and Malalasekhera, 1st ed., Longman
4 2007
Scientific & Technical.

Course Name : MICRO-NANO SCALE HEAT TRANSFER

Course Code : ME2031/ME4031
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concept of micro/nano scale heat transfer and micro/nano-fluids.
2 To understand the conduction, convection and radiation heat transfer at micro/nano scale.
3 To study the thermal energy storage and transport system.
4 To know the basics of micro-fluidics based devices for micro-flow and biological systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Micro-Nano Scale Phenomena, Basics of Micro/Nano Scale Heat 7
Transfer and Fluid Mechanics, Miniaturization, Difference between Micro and Macro
1 Scale Heat Transfer Phenomena, Impact of Micro-Nano Technology, Statistical
Thermodynamics, Quantum Mechanics, Thermal Properties of Molecules and Kinetic
Theory.
THERMAL TRANSPORT IN SOLID MICRO-NANO STRUCTURES: Electron 7
and Phonon Scattering, Size Effects, Quantum Conductance, Electronic Band Theory,
2
Tunneling, Non-equilibrium Heat Conduction and Analysis of Solid State Devices like
Thermoelectric Refrigeration and Optoelectronics.
3 HEAT TRANSFER AT MICRO-NANO SCALE: Fundamentals and Engineering 10
 77

Applications, Methods and Observations of Thermo-Physical Phenomena in Size-

Affected Domains, Principal Concepts and Practical Design Engineering, Modern
Engineering Applications: Micro-channel Heat Sinks, Micro Heat Exchangers and
Micro Heat Pipes. Fundamentals of Nano Scale Thermal Phenomena in Fluids: Nano
Scale Thermal Phenomena, Nano-scale Thermal Radiation and Radiative Properties of
Nano-materials, Surface Electromagnetic Waves, Problems on Micro-scale
Conduction, Convection and Radiation Heat Transfer and Modeling.
THERMAL ENERGY STORAGE AND TRANSPORT: Storage by Conduction in 7
Natural and Engineered Structures, Thermal Energy in Two Carriers, I.E. Phonons and
Electrons, Solid-State Transport, Quantum of Thermal Conductance, Ballistic Interface
4
Resistance and Carrier Scattering, Bulk Material Properties: Thermal and Electrical
Conductivity Derived from Particle Transport Theories, Effects of Spatial Confinement
on Bulk Properties.
MICRO-FLUIDICS: Introduction, Important forces and scaling analysis, Governing 5
equations, Fluids flowing in miniaturized systems, Applications: Fluid control devices,
5
gas and fluid measurement devices, medical testing equipments and implantable drug
pumps.
NANO-FLUIDICS: Introduction, Fundamentals of Nano-fluidics, Nano-fluidic 6
Energy Absorption: Converting Mechanical Energy to Thermal Energy, Nano-fluidic
6 Energy Tapping: Temporarily Storing Mechanical Energy, Nano-fluidic Actuation:
Converting Thermal/Electrical Energy to Mechanical Energy, Nano-fluidic Energy
Harvesting: Converting Thermal/Mechanical Energy to Electrical Energy.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the difference among the heat transports phenomena at L2
macro, micro, and nano-scale.
2 Apply the concepts of the thermal energy storage and transport at micro- L3
nano scale systems.
3 Analyze the heat transfer processes occurring by means of conduction, L4
convection and radiation at small scale.
4 Examine heat storage and heat transfer in solids at micro-nano structure L5
levels, and transport behaviour in micro-nano fluidic applications.
5 Evaluate the performance of micro-fluidic and nano-fluidic system, and L5 & L6
develop new system.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Micro-scale and nano-scale heat transfer - Fundamentals and engineering 2008
1
applications, C.B. Sobhan, G.P. Peterson, CRC press.
 78

Micro-scale heat transfer - Fundamentals and applications in biological and micro- 2004
2 electro-mechanical systems, Editors: S. Kakaç, L.L. Vasiliev, Y. Bayazitoğlu, Y.
Yener, Springer.
3 Nano/Micro-scale Heat Transfer, Zhuomin Zhang, McGraw-Hill 2007
Thermal Energy at the Nano-scale - Lessons from Nano science, A Lecture Notes 2013
4
Series, Timothy S Fisher.
Micro fluidics and Nano fluidics - Theory and Selected Applications, Clement 2013
5
Kleinstreuer, Wiley.
6 Introduction to Micro-fluidics, Patrick Tabeling, Oxford University Press 2010
7 Introduction to Bio-MEMS, Albert Folch, CRC press 2012

Course Name : POWER PLANT ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2032/ME3004/ME4032/ME6004
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand different types of steam cycles and estimate efficiencies in a steam power plant.
2 To describe basic working principles of hydro, gas turbine, diesel engine and nuclear power plants.
3 To understand the power plant economics, depreciation and cost of producing power.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 STEAM POWER PLANT: Introduction, configuration of steam power plant, basic 12
cycles of operation, Reheat-regenerative cycle, binary cycle, topping and superimposed
cycle.
Steam generators: Modern generators, once through and fluidized bed boilers design.
Consideration of modern steam generators, furnace, fuel firing methods, fuel and ash
handling systems, various accessories of steam generators, steam pressure &
temperature control.
Steam Turbines: Details of construction, accessories, governing, turbine blades, power
calculations, arrangement of turbines, industrial turbines. Condensers and Cooling
Towers: Performance, heat transfer design, calculations, efficiencies, detail
construction, cooling water circuit, environmental aspects.
2 HYDEL POWER PLANT: Hydrology, rainfall measurement hydrographs, flow 6
duration curves, site selection, classification of hydro stations, capacity of hydro
stations, selection of prime movers, governing of water turbines, operation of different
components of hydro station reservoirs, dam, spillway, canals, penstock, water hammer
surge tank, Draft-tubes, specific speeds of turbines, Advantages and disadvantages of
HPP.
3 DIESEL POWER PLANT: Diesel plant elements, arrangements of diesel plant, 6
diesel engine fuel injection system, air intake system, engine lubrication and engine
cooling systems, supercharging and superchargers. Methods of starting and stopping
the engines. Advantages and disadvantages of using diesel power plant, Economics of
diesel plant over steam and hydro-electric plant.
4 GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT: General features and characteristics and their 8
application power plants, Analysis of different cycles, components of gas turbine
power plants, governing system of gas turbine plant, advantages of G. T. plant, Gas
and steam turbines, combined cycles –Thermodynamic analysis for optimum design,
advantages and performance of combined cycles, economics of combined cycle.
5 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT: Atomic structure, energy levels, binding energy. 7
Radioactivity, decay laws, half-life, nuclear reaction. The fission chain reaction
 79

(Controlled and uncontrolled). Maintenance of chain reaction, heat removal, reactor

fuels and materials. Some common types of power reactors. Pressurized water reactor,
boiling water reactor and gas cooled reactor. Reactor system safety provisions, Fusion
reaction, site selection, Economics of nuclear power plants, Air pollution, Power plant
and the air pollution, Units of radiation dose, Control of internal and external hazards,
Combined cycle with nuclear power plants.
6 POWER PLANT ECONOMICS: Fluctuating load on power plants, load curves, 3
various performance factors of power station. Effect of variable load power plant
design and operation. Economic analysis of power plants, tariffs, load division,
combined operation of different power plants, heat rate, incremental heat rate, selection
of power plant and station equipment.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Steam power plant.
2 Classify various types of fuels used in thermal power plant and explain their L1, L2, L3, L4
handling, combustion etc. Explain ash handling and dust collection
mechanism, principle of fluidized bed combustion
3 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Hydel power plant.
4 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Diesel and gas power plant.
5 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Nuclear power plant.
6 Evaluate the Effect of variable load power plant design and operation and its L1, L2, L3, L4,L5
economic analysis.

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO6 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Power Plant Engineering, T. Morse, Tata McGraw Hill. 2010
2 Power Station Engineering & Economy, Skrotzki, McGraw Hill. 2008
3 Steam Power Plants, Potter, Ronald Press co., New York 2011
4 Nuclear Power Plant, Taylor, Philosophical Library. 2010
5 Power Plant Engineering, Mahesh Verma, Metropolitan. 2012
6 Power Plant Engineering, Domkundwar, Dhanpat Rai and sons 2016
 80

Open Elective Courses

 81

Course Name : MEMS AND MICRO SYSTEM DESIGN

Course Code : ME2033/ME3005/ME6005
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.
2 To educate on the rudiments of micro fabrication techniques.
3 To introduce various sensors and actuators.
4 To introduce different materials used in MEMS.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO MEMS: Origin of Micro-electro-mechanical-systems 8
1 (MEMS), Intrinsic characteristics of MEMS and their applications, scaling laws in
miniaturization, Materials for MEMS, the multidisciplinary nature of micro-systems.
MICROMACHINING TECHNOLOGIES: Additive techniques, Oxidation & 6
2
physical vapor deposition, Chemical vapor deposition, and other additive techniques.
MECHANICS AND DESIGN OF MICRO-SYSTEMS: Mechanics, Dynamics, 8
electrostatics, Advanced MEMS operating, Principles for sensing and actuation
3
including Piezo resistive, Piezoelectric, Thermo-mechanical, Magnetic, Micro-fluidics:
Flow, heat and mass transfer at small scales, Electro kinetics.
WORKING PRINCIPLE OF MICROSYSTEMS: Micro-sensors, acoustic wave 8
sensors, biomedical and nano-sensors, chemical sensors, optical sensors, pressure
4 sensors, thermal sensors, micro-actuation through thermal forces, SMA-Piezo electric
crystals, and electrostatic forces, magnetic actuation, Micro devices: Micro-grippers,
Micro-motors, Micro-valves, Micro pumps, Micro-accelerometers.
POLYMER MEMS: Polymers in MEMS, Poymide, SU-8, Liquid Crystal Polymer 6
5 (LCP), PDMS, PMMA, Parylene, Fluorocarbon, Application to Acceleration, Pressure,
Flow and Tactile sensors.
CASE STUDIES OF MEMS PRODUCTS: Micro-fluidic devices, Micro/nano 6
6 transducers, Blood pressure sensor, Microphone-acceleration sensors, Gyroscope,
Magnetic actuation.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Review the fundamentals of MEMS. L1
2 Apply the basics of electro-magnetic fabrication techniques in mechanical L3
engineering
3 Analyze the mechanics and design of micro-systems. L4
4 Understand the working principle of MEMS sensors and actuators. L2
5 Choose the basic devices and techniques to be used in polymer MEMS. L5
6 Prepare the case studies on MEMS for different industrial applications. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
 82

CO4 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 1 1 2 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Foundation of MEMS, C Liu, Pearson Education. 2017
Micro sensors, MEMS and Smart devices, JW Gardner, VK Varadhan, John Wiley & 2001
2
Sons.
Nano structure and Nano materials, synthesis, properties and applications, G Cao, 2011
3
Ying, World Scientific Publishing Co.
4 MEMS and Micro system Design and Manufacturing, T R Hsu, Tata McGraw Hill. 2017
5 Nano Scale Science and Technology, Robert K, Ian W H, Mark Geoghegan. 2005

Course Name : PRINCIPLES OF PRODUCT DESIGN

Course Code : ME2034/ME3006/ME6006
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1 Learn the technologies and practical applications in the product design and development.
2 Learn how to manage a product over whole product lifecycle.
3 Understand the components and their functions in product design and development processes.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
OVERVIEW OF THE DESIGN PROCESS: Philosophy of Engineering Design, 3
1
Steps involved in the Design Process, S-curves, Challenges of Product Development.
PROBLEM DEFINITION: Identifying Customer needs and requirements, 6
2 Establishing Engineering Characteristics, Quality Function Deployment (QFD),
Product Design Specification.
FUNCTIONAL DESIGN: Functions in engineering Design, Basics of Function 7
3 Structure, Functional analysis and its steps, Functional Basis, Functional
decomposition and flow.
PRODUCT CONCEPT: Methods of concept generation, Theory of resolution of 8
4
invention-related tasks (TRIZ), Concept selection and methods of evaluation.
EMBODIMENT DESIGN: Product architecture, configuration, parametric design, 8
5 systems approach and other consideration, Introduction to product metrics, Product
evaluation techniques.
INDUSTRIAL DESIGN: Aesthetics and ergonomic aspects of product design, 6
6 Concepts of Value Engineering, Evaluation of function, cost, worth and value, Failure
mode and effects analysis.
LEGAL AND ETHICAL ISSUES IN INDUSTRY: Origin of laws, Contracts, 4
7
Product Liability, Tort Law, Codes of Ethics and solving ethical conflicts.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand and analyze the product design and development processes. L2 & L4
2 Apply and evaluate the methodologies for product design, development and L3 & L5
management.
 83

3 Differentiate between embodiment and industrial design. L4

4 Create and plan a methodical approach to the management of product L6
development to satisfy customer needs.
5 Interpret the legal and ethical issue in product development. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 1 2 3 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 1 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 1 3 1
CO5 - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - 2 1 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engineering Design, George E Dieter, 3rd ed., McGraw Hill. 2001
2 Engineering Design, Pahl, W Beitz J Feldhusun, K G Grote, 3rd ed., Springer. 2007
Product Design and Development, Karl T. Ulrich, Steven D. Eppinger, Tata McGraw 2007
3
Hill.
4 The Mechanical Design Process, David G. Ullman, McGraw Hill. 2003

Course Name : SYSTEM DYNAMICS AND CONTROL

Course Code : ME2035/ME3007/ME6007
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to understand

1 Fundamental techniques for modeling of dynamic systems.
2 System models in the time and frequency domains.
3 Feedback control systems and parameters which influences the stability and performance.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Fourier and Laplace transforms description of systems, 6
1 Mathematical Modeling of flow, heat transfer, electrical, pneumatic and vibration
systems, Numerical computations and simulations using MATLAB.
ANALYSIS OF LINEAR SYSTEMS: Linearization, Linear system, Transfer 7
function models, Block diagram representation, Signal flow graph, Transient response
2 analysis using Laplace transform, First and second order systems and their
characteristics, Higher order systems, Steady state error and error constants, Design
and performance in time domain.
LINEAR FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEMS: Characteristics of feedback control 6
systems: Disturbance rejection, sensitivity, Standard feedback controllers: On/off,
3
Proportional, integral, derivative, PD and PID, Numerical computations using
MATLAB.
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS: Sensors for 4
4 temperature, pressure, flow and motion control, accelerometers, gyroscope, encoders,
solenoids, potentiometers, Tacho-generator, hydraulic amplifier, DC motor and stepper
 84

motors.
STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEMS: Poles and zeros, complex plane, Routh’s 6
5 criterion, Delay and its influence on control system performance, Frequency response,
Bode plots, Nyquist plot, Nyquist stability criterion.
CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN: Root locus method of design, Lead and lag 7
compensation, Control system design using Frequency response, Frequency domain
6 specifications, Gain margin, Phase margin, Correlation of Frequency and time domain
specifications, Frequency domain design, Lead and lag compensator design using Bode
Plots.
INTRODUCTION TO MODERN CONTROL: State space representation, Pole 6
7
placement, state observer, Control with state feedback.

List of experiments No of Hrs

Students shall be performing modelling and simulation of different engineering problems of 14
system dynamics and control using coding tools in the laboratory.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basics of Fourier and Laplace transformation. L1
2 Apply transfer functions to analyze the mechanical systems. L3 & L4
3 Understand and apply the feedback control techniques to optimize the L2 & L3
working of mechanical systems.
4 Understand the principles and methods of modeling the interfaces between L2
rotational-mechanical, translational-mechanical, electrical, fluid, and thermal
systems.
5 Develop the control system to generate and analyze the time and frequency L4 & L6
Domain characteristics.
6 Evaluate the stability of control systems. L5

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Modern Control Engineering, Katsuhiko Ogata, Prentice Hall. 2010
2 Control Systems: Principles and Design, M. Gopal, Tata McGraw-Hill Education 2002
3 Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems, G. F. Franklin, 6 ed., Pearson. 2009
System Dynamics: An Introduction, Derek Rowell and David N. Wormley, Prentice 1997
4
Hall.
Introduction to Dynamics and Control in Mechanical Engineering Systems, Cho W. S. 2016
5
To, Wiley-ASME Press Series
 85

Course Name : SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES

Course Code : ME2036/ME3008/ME6008
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1 Learn about different types of smart materials and design smart structures.
Understand the techniques to develop solutions for industrial problems using smart structures and
2
materials.
3 Learn the engineering principles in smart sensor, actuator and transducer technologies.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTELLIGENT MATERIALS: Primitive functions of intelligent materials, 4
1 Intelligence inherent in materials, Materials intelligently harmonizing with humanity,
Intelligent biological materials.
SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS: Actuator materials, 7
Sensing technologies, Micro-sensors, Intelligent systems, Hybrid smart materials,
2
Passive sensory smart structures, Reactive actuator based smart structures, Active
sensing and reactive smart structures, Smart skins.
ELECTRO-RHEOLOGICAL AND MAGNETO-RHEOLOGICAL FLUIDS: 6
Suspensions and electro & magneto-rheological fluids, Electro & Magneto-rheological
3
phenomena and working principle, Charge migration mechanism for the dispersed
phase, Electro & Magneto-rheological fluid actuators.
PIEZOELECTRIC MATERIALS: Background, Piezoelectricity, Industrial 5
4
piezoelectric materials, Smart materials featuring piezoelectric elements.
SHAPE MEMORY MATERIALS: Background and Applications, Continuum 7
5 applications: Structures and machine systems, Discrete applications, Impediments to
applications of shape-memory-alloys, Shape-memory-plastics.
FIBER-OPTICS: Overview, Advantages of fiber-optics, Light propagation in an 6
6 optical fiber, Embedding optical fibers in fibrous polymeric thermosets, Fiber-optic
strain sensors.
PIEZOELECTRIC VIBRATIONS ABSORBER SYSTEMS: Introduction, Single 7
mode absorber, theory, design solution, extension including viscous modal damping,
7 electromechanical coupling coefficient, inductance, Multimode absorber, derivation of
transfer function, design solution, self-tuning absorber, performance function and
control scheme.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the primitive functions of the smart materials and their L2
implementation.
2 Apply the principles of operation and methods of analyses employed in smart L3
materials.
3 Distinguish the materials for their properties and different applications. L4
4 Evaluate piezoelectric materials; shape memory materials, electrorheological & L5
magnetorheological fluids.
5 Understand and analyze the principles of fiber optics for newer applications L2, L4
6 Adapt alternative solution for vibration suppression, shape control and sizing of L6
mechanical systems using smart materials

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

 86

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
nd
Smart Materials and structures, M.V. Gandhi and B.S. Thompson, 2 ed., Chapman & 1992
1
Hall.
Smart Structures and Structuronic System, U. Gabbert and H.S. Tzou, Kluwer 2001
2
Academic Publishers.
Smart Structures - Analysis and Design, A.V. Srinivasan and D. Michael McFarland, 2001
3
Cambridge University Press.
Smart Material Structures: Modeling, Estimation and Control, H.T. Banks, R.C. Smith 1999
4
and Y.W. Qang, 6th ed., John Wiley & Sons.

Course Name : TRIBOLOGY AND LUBRICATION

Course Code : ME2037/ME3009/ME6009
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: This course is aimed to

Give exposure to the students about the interaction between the three basic areas of engineering, i.e.,
1
friction, wear and lubrication.
2 Give exposure to complete range of industrial lubricants and their mechanical behavior.
3 Enable students to design sliding contact and rolling contact bearings.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Sr. Contents
No.
SURFACE INTERACTION AND FRICTION: Topography of surfaces, Surface 7
features: properties and measurement, surface interaction, adhesive theory of sliding
1 friction, rolling friction, friction properties of metallic and non-metallic materials, friction
in extreme conditions, thermal considerations in sliding contact, concept on geometry for
the performance analysis of bearing.
WEAR AND SURFACE TREATMENT: Types of wears, mechanism of various types of 7
wear, laws of wear, theoretical wear models, wear of metals and non-metals, plastics and
2
ceramics, surface treatments, surface modifications, surface topography measurements, laser
methods, instrumentation, international standards in friction and wear measurements.
LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION REGIMES: Lubricants and their physical 7
properties, viscosity and other properties of oils, additives and selection of lubricants,
3
Lubricants Standards: ISO, SAE, AGMA, BIS standards, lubrication regimes, solid
lubrication, dry and marginally lubricated contacts, boundary lubrication.
SELECTION OF BEARINGS: Selection criteria, dry and boundary lubrication bearings, 6
hydrostatic and hydrodynamic bearings, electromagnetic bearings, dry bearings, rolling
4 element bearings, bearings for precision applications, foil bearings, special bearings,
selection of plain bearing materials, metallic and non-metallic bearings, tolerance on
bearings.
 87

THEORY OF HYDROSTATIC AND HYDRODYNAMIC LUBRICATION: Reynolds 8

equation, assumptions and limitations, one and two dimensional Reynolds equation,
Somerfield boundary conditions, pressure wave, flow, load capacity and friction calculations
5
in hydrodynamic bearings, long and short bearings, pad bearings and journal bearings,
squeeze film effects, thermal considerations, hydrostatic bearings & lubrication, design of
foil bearings, air bearings.
HIGH PRESSURE CONTACTS AND ELASTO HYDRODYNAMIC 7
LUBRICATION: Rolling contacts of elastic solids, contact stresses, Hertzian stress,
spherical and cylindrical contacts, contact fatigue life, oil film effects, Elasto Hydrodynamic
Lubrication: Theory of soft and hard elasto hydrodynamic lubrication, Reynolds equation
6 for elasto hydrodynamic lubrication, film shape within and outside contact zones, film
thickness and friction calculation, rolling bearings, stresses and deflections, traction drives,
internal clearance, shaft and housing fit, mounting arrangements, materials for rolling
bearings, manufacturing methods, ceramic bearings, rolling bearing cages bearing seals
selection.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Recall and understand the basics of friction, wear and lubrication L1, L2
2 Apply and evaluate wear mechanism principles to different kinds of materials. L3, L5
Analyze the mechanical behavior of lubricants while working between rubbing
3 L4
surfaces under load without causing wear.
Selection & design of Journal, Ball and Roller Bearings for different
4 L6
applications.
Recall the various equations of fluid mechanics and conjecture these with
5 L1, L6
hydrodynamic lubrication.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Friction and Wear of Materials, E. Rabinowicz, John Willey & Sons, UK. 1995
2 Basic Lubrication Theory, A. Cameron, Ellis Herward Ltd., UK. 1981
3 Principles of Tribology, J. Halling, Macmillian. 1984
4 Engineering Tribology, J. A. Williams, Oxford Univ. Press. 1994
Fundamentals of Tribology, S. K. Basu, S. N. Sengupta & B. B. Ahuja, Prentice-Hall 2005
5
of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Engineering Tribology, G. W. Stachowiak & A.W. Batchelor, Butterworth- 2005
6
Heinemann, UK.
7 Tribology Hand Book, M.J. Neale, Butterworth Heinemann, UK. 2001

Course Name : MODELING AND SIMULATION

Course Code : ME2038/ME30010/ME6010
 88

Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1. Understand modelling technique for analysis and synthesis of real-world problems.
2. Understand the energy interaction of different components of a system.
3. Learn different simulation techniques applied to mechanical systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: System, environment, input and output variables, State variables, 8
1 Static and Dynamic systems, Hierarchy of knowledge about a system and modeling
strategy, Physical Modeling: Similarity criteria and their application.
MODELING OF SYSTEM: Review of conservation laws and governing equations of 10
heat, mass and momentum transfer, Deterministic model: Distributed parameter models
2 in terms of partial identification and their solutions, Lumped parameter models in
terms of differential and difference equations, state space model, transfer functions
block diagram and sub systems, stability of transfer functions, modeling for control.
SYSTEM SIMULATION: Techniques of simulation, Monte Carlo method, 8
Experimental nature of simulation, Numerical computation techniques, Continuous
3
system models, Analog and Hybrid simulation, Feedback systems, Computers in
simulation studies, Simulation software packages.
SYSTEM DYNAMICS: Growth and Decay models, Logistic curves, System 8
dynamics diagrams, Probability Concepts in Simulation: Stochastic variables, discrete
4
and continuous probability functions, Random numbers, Generation of Random
numbers, Variance reduction techniques, Determination of length of simulation runs.
SIMULATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Building of Simulation models, 8
Simulation of translational and rotational mechanical systems, Simulation of hydraulic
5 and pneumatic systems, Simulation of waiting line systems, Job shop with material
handling and flexible manufacturing systems, Simulation software for manufacturing,
Structure and development of expert systems.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the conservation laws and governing equations of heat, mass and L1
momentum transfer.
2 Understand various systems and their input/output and state variables. L2
3 Apply the concepts of physical and deterministic models for modelling of L3
systems.
4 Analyse and evaluate various system simulation techniques and feedback L4
control systems.
5 Generate and evaluate the system equations using different modelling L5 & L6
techniques.
6 Develop mechanical systems and perform its simulations. L3 & L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
 89

CO5 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Principles of Modeling and Simulation: A Multidisciplinary Approach, John A. 2009
1
Sokolowski and Catherine M. Banks, Elsevier.
Theory of Modeling and Simulation, Zeigler B.P. Praehofer and I.G. Kim, 2 nd ed., 2000
2
Academic press.
System Dynamics, Modeling and Simulation of Mechatronic Systems, D.C. Karnopp, 2000
3
D.L. Margolis and R.C. Rosenberg, John Wiley & Sons, NY.

Course Name : HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS CONTROL DESIGN

Course Code : ME2039/ME30011/ME6011
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To provide an insight into the capabilities of hydraulic and pneumatic fluid power.
To understand the concepts and relationships surrounding force, pressure, energy and power in fluid
2
power systems.
To examine concepts centering on sources of hydraulic power, rotary and linear actuators, distribution
3
systems, hydraulic flow in pipes, and control components in fluid power systems.
To provide the exposure to build and interpret hydraulic and pneumatic circuits related to industrial
4
applications.
5 To familiarize with logic controls and trouble shooting.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASIC PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS: Introduction and basic 5
elements of fluid power system, their structure, advantages and limitation, Applications
of fluid power, pneumatic vs hydraulics control systems, Properties of fluids for
1 hydraulic systems and governing laws, review of pneumatics in distribution of fluid
power, Structure and signal flow of hydraulic and pneumatic system, Basic types and
constructions of hydraulic pumps, motors and compressors, Air generation and
distribution, Processing elements, Power components.
FLUID ACCESSORIES: Air receiver, after-cooler, Air Dryer, Air Filter, Pressure 5
Regulator, Air Lubricator, Air Service Unit, Pipeline layout, Seals, Hydraulic fluids,
2
Hydraulic reservoir, Hydraulic filter, Hydraulic Accumulator, Intensifier, Pressure
gauges and Volume Meters, Lines, Fitting and Connectors, Hydraulic seals.
ACTUATORS AND OUTPUT DEVICES: Cylinders, Classification of cylinders on 5
the basis of construction, Single and Double acting cylinders, their types, Classification
of cylinders on the basis of working Medium: hydraulic and Pneumatic, rod-less
cylinders, Cylinder construction, mounting arrangement Construction and working of
3
rotary actuators such as gear, vane, piston and hydraulic motors. Theoretical torque,
power, flow-rate, hydraulic motor performance, Symbolic representation of actuators
(cylinders and motors), Cylinder performance characteristics, Symbols of Motors,
Classification of fluid motors.
CONTROL ELEMENTS: Classification of the valves, Direction Control valves, 8
4
Poppet valves, Function of a 3/2-way NC and NO poppet valve, Manual and
 90

Mechanical operation of poppet valves, Mini poppet valves, 3/2-way and 5/2-way
spool valves, Manual and mechanical operating devices for spool valves, Pneumatic
operating devices for the valves , Directly operated solenoid valves , Servo solenoid
valves with internal pilot and external pilot, Three-position valves, Blocking valves:
Unidirectional, bidirectional, Signal processing valves, Nominal flow rate, Sizing of
directional control distribution valves and connecting tubes, Interception valves, Non
return, Flow and Pressure valves, Valve combination, Quick exhaust valve, Time delay
Valve/Air Timer, Pneumatic Logic Valves, Twin Pressure valve, Shuttle Valve,
Symbolic representation.
DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CONTROL CIRCUIT: Symbols and description of 6
components, Rules for designing circuits, Control chain, design of circuit diagram,
circuit layout, designation of individual elements, Single or semi-automatic cycle,
Continuous or automatic cycle, Elementary circuits, Signals generated by limit
switches, Hydraulic circuit for control of single acting and double acting cylinder,
6 Speed control in hydraulic circuits, Bleed of circuit, Regenerative circuit, Sequencing
circuit, hydraulic circuit for force multiplication, speed control of hydraulic cylinder-
metering in, metering out and bleed off circuits, Pilot pressure operated circuits,
Hydraulic circuit with accumulator, counter balance valve application, Memory valves,
Timer, Cycle start command, Single and continuous cycle, Emergency
commandpressure reduction circuit, problems in circuit design.
DESIGN OF PNEUMATIC CONTROL CIRCUIT: Pneumatic Circuits for control 7
of single acting and double acting cylinder, Simple Pneumatic Control: Direct and
indirect actuation pneumatic cylinders, speed control of cylinders, supply air and
exhaust air throttling, Circuit with mechanical feedback, Use of flow control valve and
Quick exhaust valve, Time delay circuit, Circuit with necessary conditions,
7
Application of Twin pressure and Shuttle valve, Signal Processing Elements: Use of
Logic gates, OR and AND gates in pneumatic application, Practical examples
involving the use of logic gates, Electro-Pneumatic Control: Principles, signal input
and output, pilot assisted solenoid control of directional control valves, use of relay and
contactors, Control circuitry for simple signal cylinder application.
CONTROL SYSTEMS: Open and closed loop control system, Selection and 6
comparison of working and control media, Control Theory, Control system
8 development: Positional sketch, Displacement, step diagram, Control Chart, Function
Diagram, Function chart, Circuit diagram, Cascade Design, Steps involved in cascade
design, Sign Conventions, Development aspects, Emergency control.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall basic elements of fluid mechanics and logic gates L1
2 Identify and analyze the functional requirements of a fluid power L2 & L4
transmission system for a given application.
3 Understand the working of hydraulic/pneumatic circuit to accomplish the L2
desired function.
4 Design an appropriate hydraulic/pneumatic/combination circuit like electro- L6
hydraulics, electro-pneumatics for a given application.
5 Select and standardize the different components of the circuit. L5
6 Apply the control systems development techniques in industrial applications. L3

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
 91

CO2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Fundamentals of Fluid Power Control, John Watton, Cambridge University press. 2012
2 Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Andrew Par, Jaico Publishing House. 2005
3 Fluid Power with Applications, Anthony Esposito, Pearson. 2000
4 Introduction to Fluid Power, Thomson, Prentice Hall. 2004
Pneumatic systems – Principles and Maintenance, Majumdar S.R., Tata Mc-Graw 2005
5
Hill, New Delhi.
6 Oil Hydraulics, S. R. Majumdar, Tata Mc-Graw Hill. 2002

Course Name : NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES

Course Code : ME2040/ME3012/ME6012
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To understand the

1 Solar energy, wind energy and biomass energy technologies.
2 Basic concepts of solar radiation, solar thermal systems and PV cells.
3 Wind-energy potential and get familiarize with different systems for its effective utilization.
4 Bio-energy generation from the bio-waste and waste management system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to sustainable energy, energy and environment, 4
energy scenario and role of renewable in India, human development index,
1
conventional energy sources, limited fossil fuels, environmental impact of fossil fuels,
energy alternatives, introduction to various sources of renewable energy.
SOLAR RADIATION AND ITS MEASUREMENT: Extra-terrestrial radiation, 4
2 spectral distribution, solar constant, solar radiations on earth, measurement of solar
radiations, solar radiation geometry, solar radiation on tilted surface.
SOLAR ENERGY: Solar flat plate collector, solar air heater, solar water heater, types 6
of concentrating collectors, solar energy tracking systems, introduction to solar thermal
3
energy storage systems, solar energy plants in India, Solar energy mission,
environmental impact of solar energy, Solar photovoltaic systems and applications.
WIND ENERGY: Introduction, Wind resource assessment, wind data and energy 12
estimation, energy pattern factor in wind power, Weibull probability density function,
Beaufort wind scale, Wind power generation curve, Fundamentals and classification of
4 wind turbines, aerodynamic design principles, Modern wind turbines and their
characteristics, power extraction and control strategies, Modes of wind power
generation, Wind energy farms, Wind energy power plants in India, Futuristic hybrid
wind-solar system, Economic consideration and environmental impact.
BIO-ENERGY: Introduction, Photosynthesis, Constituents of biomass materials, 12
5
Analysis of biomass: Biochemical, Proximate analysis, Ultimate analysis, Primary
 92

biomass as source of energy: Woody biomass, oilseed crops, energy plantation,

Secondary biomass as source of energy: Residues and wastes, Processes of biomass
separation and pelleting, Thermochemical Processing: Combustion, pyrolysis,
gasification, hydrothermal processing, transesterification, producer gas, bio-diesel,
Biochemical Processing: Anaerobic digestion, fermentation to produce ethanol,
enzymatic conversion, Bio-power generation systems: Energy from urban waste, liquid
waste, Power generation from landfill gas, biomass cogeneration, biomass resource
development in India, environmental impact and future of bio-energy.
WASTE CYCLE MANAGEMENT: Introduction, Common source of waste, 4
6 Different types of waste, Waste management, Recycling processes and waste
management, Advantages and disadvantages of recycling waste and Recycling plants.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Introduction to energy and environment, energy scenario in India and role of L2
renewable energy.
2 Demonstrate various renewable energy systems based on solar, wind and bio- L3
energy, and discuss their present status and future plans in India.
3 Estimate the solar radiation, formulate heat transfer equations, and analyze L4
modern energy conversion systems used in solar applications. L5
4 Examine the wind energy potential and evaluate the performance of wind L4
energy plants. L5
5 Examine different methods of bio-energy sources, bio-energy harvesting, L4
waste cycle management, and evaluate their economic and operational L5
viability.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Non-Conventional Energy Sources, G.D. Rai, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2014
2 Renewable Energy Resources, Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., EFN Spon Ltd., UK 2005
Renewable Energy: Power for a Sustainable Future, Godfrey Boyle, Oxford
3 2012
University Press, U.K.
Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage, S.P. Sukhatme, Tata
4 2009
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications, G.N. Tiwari,
5 2015
Alpha, Science Intl Ltd.
6 Non-Conventional Energy Resources, B.H. Khan, McGraw Hill 2009
Wind Energy Explained-Theory, Design and Applications, J. F. Manwell, J. G.
7 2010
McGowan, and A. L. Rogers, 2nd ed. Wiley
8 Renewable Energy Resources, J. Twidell and T. Weir, 3rd ed. Routledge 2015
9 Principles of Sustainable Energy Systems, F. Kreith, 2nd ed. CRC Press 2014
 93

Course Name : ADVANCED UNCONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES

Course Code : ME2041/ME3013/ME6013
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
To get an exposure of hydrogen energy, fuel cells, nuclear energy, tidal energy and geothermal energy
1
technologies.
2 To understand the basic concepts and different systems involved in utilizing hydrogen as a fuel.
To understand the potential and applications of nuclear energy, tidal and wind energy and geothermal
3
energy.
To understand the thermoelectric and thermionic convertors, MHD generator and small Hydel
4
turbines.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
HYDROGEN ENERGY: Hydrogen as a fuel, Properties and Sources of Hydrogen, 8
Production, Storage and Transportation Methods, Controlled and Uncontrolled
1
Hydrogen Combustion, Hydrogen as a Fuel in Automobiles, Hydrogen Management
and Mitigation Strategies (including safety systems), Environmental Benefits.
FUEL CELLS: Introduction, difference between batteries and fuel cell, Working 8
principle of Fuel Cell, Different components of fuel cells, Operating and Performance
Characteristics of Fuel Cell, Types of fuel cell, Hydrogen Fuel Cell and Analysis, Fuel
2
cell power plants, Fuel cell application in automobiles, Problems with Fuel Cells,
Overview on ongoing research activities in India and World, Future potential of fuel
cells.
NUCLEAR ENERGY: Nuclear energy scenario in India and World, India’s three 8
stage nuclear program, Introduction to nuclear fusion and fission reactions, Fissionable
materials, Nuclear Fission Power Plants: Types of power plants (BWR, PWR, and
PHWR), Basic components, construction and working of a nuclear reactors, Nuclear
3
reactor containment: Purpose and basic construction, passive containment cooling
concept, Introduction to various safety systems, 4th generation Nuclear Power Plants,
Radiation leakage and its effect on nearby habitants, Nuclear waste and its disposal,
Nuclear fusion reactors.
TIDAL AND WAVE ENERGY: Origin of Tides, types of tidal power generation 6
systems, important components, tidal power development in India, economics of tidal
4 power, Wave Energy: Basic theory, Open and closed Ocean Thermal Energy
Conversion Cycles (OTECs), global development of OTEC plants, OTEC development
in India.
GEOTHERMAL ENERGY: Introduction, Sources, physics of deep geothermal 4
resources, technologies for exploiting high enthalpy steam feeds, Geothermal power
5 plants, geothermal preheat hybrid with conventional plants, Identification and
utilization of geothermal energy in India, Recent advancement in geothermal energy,
environmental impact of geothermal energy.
OTHER ENERGY SYSTEMS: Thermo-Electric Power: Basic principles, Thermo 8
electric power generators, Applications and limitations, Thermionic Power Generation:
Basic principles, Thermionic generators, Applications and limitations, Magneto-
Hydro-Dynamics (MHD) Generators: Basics Principle of MHD generation system,
6
MHD open and closed systems, Advantages and Disadvantages of MHD, Small Hydro
Power: Resource assessment for small installations, Mini and micro hydel power
plants, classification and operating range of different hydro turbines, Indian and global
scenario of small hydro power, Hybrid Energy Systems, integrating renewable and
 94

conventional energy sources, Global impact of the unconventional energy sources.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Introduction to advanced unconventional energy resources, such as hydrogen, L2
nuclear, tidal & wave energy, geo-thermal and others.
1 Discuss hydrogen, nuclear, tidal & wave energy, geo-thermal and other L3
renewable energy systems, and their current status and future in India.
2 Explore safe and effective use of hydrogen, analyze and evaluate the L4
performance of different hydrogen fuel cells, and their implementation in L5
Indian conditions.
3 Examine the potential of nuclear energy from India’s perspective, appraise L4
different types of nuclear power plants and safety systems. L5
4 Examine geothermal, tidal and wave energies from India’s perspective and L4
defend their operational viability. L5
5 Distinguish and apply the various form of energies such as thermo-electric, L2
thermionic, magneto hydrodynamic in practical applications. L3

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Non-Conventional Energy Sources, G.D. Rai, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. 2014
2 Renewable Energy Resources, Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., EFN Spon Ltd., UK 2005
Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future, Godfrey Boyle, Oxford
3 2012
University Press, U.K.
4 Non-Conventional Energy Resources, B.H. Khan, McGraw Hill. 2009
5 Renewable Energy Resources, J. Twidell and T. Weir, 3rd ed., Routledge. 2015
6 Principles of Sustainable Energy Systems, F. Kreith, 2nd ed., CRC Press. 2014

Course Name : EXPERIMENTAL METHODS FOR ENGINEERS

Course Code : ME2042/ME3014/ME6014
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the measurement terminologies and the concept of measurement system.
2 To find the errors and uncertainty in the measurements.
3 To understand different sensors used for measurement.
4 To identify correct DAQ system for recording and analyzing the experimental results.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
 95

Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO EXPERIMENTAL METHODS: Measurement, Instrument, 5
Measurement methods, Generalized measurement system and its functional elements,
1 Classification of instruments, Basic concepts: accuracy, precision, Range, Resolution,
Span, Experiment planning, Analysis of experimental data: Error Analysis, Evaluation
of and propagation of uncertainties; Regression analysis, Calibration of instruments.
INSTRUMENT CHARACTERISTICS: Introduction, Static terms and 4
2 characteristics, Dynamic terms and characteristics, Standard test-inputs, Zero, first and
second order instruments, Response of first and second order system.
FLOW MEASUREMENT AND VISUALIZATION: Positive-displacement 10
methods, Flow-obstruction methods, Sonic nozzle, Flow measurement by drag effects,
3 Pressure probes, Hot-wire and hot-film anemometers, Magnetic flow meters, Flow
visualization methods: Smoke methods, Shadowgraph, Schlieren photography, Laser
Doppler anemometer, Laser-induced fluorescence, Particle image velocimetry.
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT: Temperature scales, Ideal-gas thermometer, 10
Temperature measurement by mechanical and electrical effects, Temperature
4 measurement by radiation, Transient response of thermal systems, Thermocouple
compensation, Temperature measuring problems in flowing fluids, Dynamic
compensation, Field temperature measurement using infrared camera.
TRANSPORT-PROPERTY MEASUREMENT: Measurement of thermal 8
conductivity, Measurement of viscosity, Gas diffusion calorimetry, Convection heat
transfer measurement, Humidity measurement, PH measurement, Thermal-radiation
5
measurements: Emissivity measurement, Reflectivity and transmissivity measurement,
Air pollution sampling and measurement, Gas sampling techniques, Combustion
products measurement.
DAQ AND SIGNAL ANALYSIS: Systems for data acquisition and processing, 5
Modules and computerized data system, Selection criteria for choosing a DAQ system,
6 Digitization rate, Time and frequency domain representation of signals, Nyquist
criterion, Techniques for signal analysis, Signal conditioners: Filters, low, high, band
pass and amplifiers.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Discuss different measurement systems and signal recording procedures. L2
2 Interpret the error and minimize the uncertainty in the experimental data. L3
3 Employ different measurement devices in real-time system to correctly L4
measure the parameters of interest.
4 Select the suitable DAQ system for recording of the experimental data. L5
5 Design and implement the experimental measurement methodology to L6
existing and new thermo-mechanical systems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 - - 2 3 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
No. Publication/
 96

Reprint
th
1 Experimental Methods for Engineers (SIE), J. P. Holman, 7 ed., McGraw-Hill. 2017
Theory and Design for Mechanical Measurements, R. S. Figliola and D. Beasley, 7th
2 2020
ed., John Wiley & Sons.
3 Measurement Systems, E. O. Doebelin, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill. 2019
4 An Introduction to Error Analysis, J. R. Taylor, 2nd ed., University Science Books. 1997
5 Theory and Design for Mechanical Measurements, Alex. C. Beasley, Intelliz Press. 2017

Course Name : THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING SYSTEM

Course Code : ME2043/ME3015/ME6015
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basics concepts of thermal management system.
2 To understand the process of convective and conduction cooling for different engineering components.
3 To have in depth understanding of various cooling technologies and cooling of PCB Systems.
To impart the knowledge of advance cooling technologies and concept of cooling in micro-electric
4
systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Need for Thermal Control, Reliability and Temperature,
1 Fundamental of Convective and Boiling Heat Transfer, Key Components of Liquid 5
Cooled System, Heat Transfer from Component to Coolant.
CONDUCTION AND CONVECTION COOLING: One-Dimensional Heat
Conduction, Application to Single Plate, Parallel Plates, Straight Fin Arrays and Pin
2 8
Fin Arrays, Thermal/Electrical Analogy, Lumped-System Transient Analysis and Heat
Conduction with Phase Change.
LIQUID COOING TECHNOLOGIES: Natural Convection Liquid Cooling, Direct
Immersion Pool Cooling, Forced Convection Liquid Cooling, Flow Boiling Cooling,
3 8
Refrigerant Cooling, Micro channel Cooling, Jet Impingement and Spray Cooling,
Forced Convection involving Phase Change Materials.
COOLING OF MICRO-ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT: Direct Immersion Cooled
4 Chip Packages, Computing Systems; Other Types of Systems, Miniature, Small & 5
Micro Scale Refrigeration Systems and Aerospace and Space Systems.
COOLING OF PCB SYSTEMS: Components of Printed Circuit Boards, Direct Air
5 Cooling and Fans, Natural and Mixed Convection, Heat Exchanger and Cooling Plates, 8
and Fans and Air-Handling Systems.
ADVANCED COOLING TECHNOLOGY: Single Phase Liquid Cooling, Two
Phase Flow Cooling, Heat Pipe Operation Principle, Useful Characteristics,
6 Operational Limits, Material Compatibility, Operating Temperatures, Operation 8
Methods, Applications and Micro Heat Pipes, Thermoelectric Coolers, Operation
Principle, System Configuration and Performance Analysis.

Course Outcome Knowledge Level

Sr. No.
By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
To understand the fluid dynamics of electronic cooling systems and heat
1 L1, L2
transfer mechanisms
To understand and develop basic concept pertaining to thermal
2 L2, L3
management of engineering system.
3 To have detailed idea of various convective and conduction cooling L5
 97

techniques for different physical systems.

To understand thermal energy conversion system and involve management
4 L6
practices for optimization of energy savings.
To apply various cooling technologies for thermal management of PCB
5 L4
systems.
To analyze advance cooling technologies and apply concepts of cooling in
6 L3, L4
micro-electronic systems.
To design of electronic equipment which minimizes the thermal failures by
7 L5, L6
having involving better technique cooling.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO2 - 1 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 - - - 1 2 3 - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 - - - - - 1 2 3 - - 2 1 2 1
CO5 - - - - - - - 2 3 1 - - 1 1
CO6 - 1 2 1 - 3 - - - - - - 1 1
CO7 - - - 1 - - - 1 2 2 1 1 1 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Thermal Design of Liquid Cooled Microelectronic Equipment, L T Yeh, ASME Press,
1 2019
New York.
Thermal Management of Microelectronic Equipment, L T Yeh and R C Chu, ASME
2 2002
Press New York.
3 Cooling of Electronic Systems, S. Kakaç H. YüncüK. Hijikata, Springer. 1993
4 Heat Transfer: Thermal Management of Electronics, Younes Shabany, CRC Press. 2010

Course Name : SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY

Course Code : ME2044/ME3016/ME6016
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic principles of solar energy.
2 To understand the design and operation of solar thermal energy conversion devices.
3 To study the industrial and building applications of the solar energy.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 OVERVIEW: Introduction, Space and Time, Solar Geometric Angles (Space), 8
Earth's Tilted Axis and the Seasons, Solar Time, Extra-terrestrial Radiation and the
Atmosphere, Micro-controller based solar energy measurement system, Materials
For Optocaloric Performance: Introduction, Heat Transfer Considerations, Radiation
Characteristics of Opaque Materials, Radiation in Cover-Absorber Systems.
2 COLLECTOR SYSTEMS: Flat-Plate Collector Systems: Introduction, Overview 14
 98

of Flat Plate Collectors, Energy Balance in Flat-Plate Collectors, Flat Plate Collector
Performance and Characterization. Concentrating Collector Systems: Introduction,
Overview of Concentrating Collectors, Non-Imaging Concentrators, Imaging
Concentrators, Solar Energy Tracking Systems. Performance Of Solar Thermal
Collectors and Systems: Introduction, Load of Solar Thermal Systems, Component
and System Models. Thermal Fluids: Introduction, Overview of Solar Thermal
Fluids, Applications of Various Fluids, Pumping Power Considerations.
3 SOLAR THERMAL POWER SYSTEMS: Introduction, Overview of Solar 4
Thermal Power Systems, Parabolic Trough Collector Systems, Central Receiver
Systems - Power Tower, Solar Updraft Towers.
4 INDUSTRIAL PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS: Introduction, Overview of 4
Solar Heat for Industrial Processes, Economic Aspects of Industrial Solar Heat,
Industrial Process Applications and Requirements.
5 APPLICATIONS OF SOLAR ENERGY: Introduction, Active versus Passive, 10
Energy storage considerations, f-Chart Method for Solar Heating Design, Solar
Cooling: Introduction, Overview of Solar Cooling, Absorption Cooling,
Psychrometrics and Desiccants, Solar Drying, Solar Desalination.
6 CURRENT MARKET: Introduction, Market Overview for Solar Thermal Energy, 2
Identifying a Good Market for STE, Solar Heating and Cooling Status and Trends.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Identify the potential and scope of solar thermal energy in context to L5
technological advancements and economics.
2 Perform thermodynamic analysis of solar cooling and heating systems L4
technologies.
3 Develop the solar thermal conversion systems for low, medium and high L6
temperature applications.
4 Predict the productivity and performance of various solar thermal collectors. L3
5 Compare performance and suitability of various solar thermo-mechanical L5
household systems.
6 Compare performance and suitability of various solar energy based industrial L5
process heating systems.

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO5 1 2 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 1 3 3
CO6 1 2 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 1 3 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year
No. of
Publication/
Reprint
 99

1 Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes, John A. Duffie, William A. Beckman, John 2013
Wiley and Sons.
2 Solar Energy - Principles of thermal collection and storage, SP Sukhatme, Tata 1984
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
3 Principles of Solar Engineering, F Kreith, JF Kreider, McGraw-Hill. 1978
4 Solar Energy: Fundamentals and Applications, Garg, J Prakash, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
New Delhi.

Course Name : NUMERICAL ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES

Course Code : ME2045/ME3017/ME6017
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the linkage between accuracy, stability, and convergence.
2 To perform error analysis for arithmetic operations.
3 To gain the basic understanding of numerical algorithms and its implementation.
4 To understand the propagation of errors through numerical algorithms.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Mathematical Preliminaries and Error Analysis: Review of 10
Calculus, Round-off Errors and Computer Arithmetic, Algorithms and Convergence,
Numerical Software, Solution of Equations in Single Variable: Bisection Method,
Fixed-Point Iteration, Newton’s Method and its Extensions, Error Analysis for
Iterative Methods, Accelerating Convergence, Zeros of Polynomials and Muller’s
Method, Interpolation and Polynomial Approximation: Interpolation and the
Lagrange Polynomial, Data Approximation and Neville’s Method, Divided
Differences, Hermite Interpolation, Cubic Spline Interpolation, Parametric Curves.
2 NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION: Numerical 4
Differentiation, Richardson’s Extrapolation, Elements of Numerical Integration,
Composite Numerical Integration, Romberg Integration, Adaptive Quadrature
Methods, Gaussian Quadrature, Multiple Integrals, Improper Integrals.
3 INITIAL-VALUE PROBLEMS: Euler’s Method, Higher-Order Taylor Methods, 12
Runge-Kutta Methods, Error Control and Runge-Kutta-Fehlberg Method, Multistep
Methods, Variable Step-Size Multistep Methods, Extrapolation Methods, Higher-
Order Equations and Systems of Differential Equations, Stability, Direct and
Iterative Methods: Linear Systems of Equations, Pivoting Strategies, Linear Algebra
and Matrix Inversion, Determinant of a Matrix, Matrix Factorization, Special Types
of Matrices, Norms of Vectors and Matrices, Eigen values and Eigenvectors, Jacobi
and Gauss-Siedel Iterative Techniques, Relaxation Techniques for Solving Linear
Systems, Error Bounds and Iterative Refinement, Conjugate Gradient Method.
4 APPROXIMATION THEORY: Discrete Least Squares Approximation, 8
Orthogonal Polynomials and Least Squares Approximation, Chebyshev Polynomials,
Rational Function Approximation, Trigonometric Polynomial Approximation, Fast
 100

Fourier Transforms, Approximating Eigen values: Linear Algebra and Eigen values,
Orthogonal Matrices and Similarity Transformations, Power Method, Householder’s
Method, QR Algorithm, Singular Value Decomposition.
5 NONLINEAR SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Fixed Points for Functions of Several 8
Variables, Newton’s Method, Quasi-Newton Methods, Steepest Descent Techniques,
Homotopy and Continuation Methods, Boundary-Value Problems: Shooting,
Rayleigh-Ritz and Finite-Difference Methods for Linear and Nonlinear Equations,
Partial Differential Equations: Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic Partial Differential
Equations.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the core ideas and concepts of numerical methods. L2
2 Use the power of abstraction and generalization in the numerical analysis. L3
3 Apply rigorous, analytic, highly numeric approach to solve engineering L3
problems using numerical methods.
4 Analyse problem solutions with correct mathematical terminology. L4
5 Select and implement the appropriate numerical solution techniques for a L5
given problem.
6 Develop problem solution methodologies and optimal solutions. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 - - 2 3 2
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 1 - 3 3 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year
No. of
Publication/
Reprint
1 Numerical Analysis, Richard L. Burden, J. Douglas Fair, 9th ed., Cengage Learning 2011
2 An Introduction to Numerical Analysis, K. E. Atkinson, 2nd ed., Wiley-India 1989
rd
3 Numerical Analysis - An Algorithmic Approach, S. D. Conte, Carl de Boor, 3 ed., 1981
McGraw-Hill.
4 Numerical Analysis, Gautschi, Walter, 2nd ed., Birkhauser. 2012

Course Name : THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF BUILDINGS

Course Code : ME2046/ME3018/ME6018
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-0-2
 101

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the principles of energy flow diagram and energy auditing in buildings.
2 To understand the thermal performance and thermal comfort in buildings via simulations.
3 To understand the energy conservation buildings codes and rating systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Energy management concept in building, Energy auditing in 6
buildings, Bio-climatic classification of India, Climate Analysis for Nat-Vent
Buildings, Mixed Mode Buildings and Conditioned building, Passive design
concepts for various climatic zones, Case studies on selected building designs.
2 VERNACULAR ARCHITECTURE: Vernacular architecture in Indian Context, 8
Factors affecting architecture, building material and construction techniques, Case
studies on vernacular architecture, Low cost buildings, climate responsive buildings,
energy efficient buildings, green buildings, intelligent buildings, Building Integrated
Photovoltaic’s (BIPV), Green Buildings in India and Case studies.
3 BUILDING CODES AND RATING SYSTEMS: LEED, GRIHA, ECBC, Thermal 8
properties and energy content of building materials, Building energy simulation,
Simulation tool like Energy plus, ESP-r, Open studio, Building management systems
and automation, Artificial and day lighting in buildings.
4 THERMAL PERFORMANCE STUDIES: Concept of comfort and neutral 6
temperatures, Thermal comfort, PMV-PPD models, Thermal comfort models,
Adaptive thermal comfort models, case studies.
5 HEAT FLOW CALCULATIONS IN BUILDINGS: Unsteady heat flows through 7
walls, roof and windows, Concept of sol-air temperature and its significance, heat
gain through building envelope, building orientation, shading and overhangs,
Ventilation and Air-conditioning systems.
6 PASSIVE HEATING CONCEPTS: Passive and low energy concepts, Applications, 7
Direct heat gain, indirect heat gain, isolated gain and sunspaces, Passive cooling
concepts: Evaporative cooling, Radiative cooling, Application of wind, water and
earth for cooling, Shading, paints and cavity walls for cooling, Roof radiation traps,
Earth air-tunnel.

Experiments:
Simulation of different building designs for effective thermal management will be performed 28
using Energy plus, ESP-r, Open studio, etc.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basics of various types of energy interactions in a building L1, L2
2 Apply simulation programs of buildings to perform energy calculations for L3
indoor comfort.
3 Evaluate and justify energy-saving measures in existing buildings. L5
4 Categorize the energy efficient measures on grounds of engineering and L4
economic feasibility.
5 Identify environmental aspects of renovation and building's energy supply L4
from a system perspective.
6 Practice simulation of different building designs for effective thermal L5
management using software
 102

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO3 1 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 -
CO5 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 - - - - - 2 -
CO6 1 1 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
No. Publication Reprint
1 Solar Passive Building, Science and Design, M.S. Sodha, N.K. Bansal, P. K. 1986
Kumar, M.A.S. Malik, Pergamon Press.
2 Handbook on Energy Conscious Buildings, J.K. Nayak, J.A. Prajapati, Solar 2006
Energy Centre, New Delhi.
3 Modelling Methods for Energy in Buildings, C.P. Underwood, F.W.H. Yik, 2004
Blackwell Publishing.
4 Human Thermal Environments, K.C. Parsons, 2nd ed., Taylor and Francis. 2003
5 Energy Efficient Buildings, M. Majumder, TERI, New Delhi 2009
6 Comfort and Energy Use in Buildings - Getting Them Right, Nicol F., 2007
Elsevier

Course Name : THERMAL ENERGY STORAGE TECHNOLOGIES

Course Code : ME2047/ME3019/ME6019
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To provide a basic background in the thermal energy storage (TES) techniques.
2 To study the sensible and latent heat storage methods.
3 To discuss different simulation techniques related to TES systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Concepts, Need and Applications of TES techniques, 7
1 Classification, Active and Passive TES systems, Basic concepts of Thermodynamics
and Heat-Transfer.
TES MATERIALS: Sensible heat storage materials, Latent heat storage materials, 6
2
Thermo-chemical heat storage materials, selection of TES materials.
SENSIBLE HEAT STORAGE: Mechanism of sensible heat storage (SHS), 7
3 Advantages and limitations of SHS, Thermal stratification and its importance,
Techniques for thermal stratification enhancement.
LATENT HEAT STORAGE: Mechanism of latent heat storage (LHS), Advantages 8
4 and limitations of LHS, Concept of melting and solidification, Techniques for
optimizing melting and solidification process.
THERMO-CHEMICAL HEAT STORAGE: Mechanism of thermo-chemical heat 7
5
storage (TCHS), Advantages and limitations of TCHS, Thermo-chemical reactions,
 103

adsorption and absorption heat storage, electro-chemical heat storage and Fuel cell.
SIMULATION OF TES SYSTEMS: Mathematical modelling basics, Simulation of 7
6 SHS, Simulation of melting and solidification, Case studies, Future trends and research
problems.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Identify the suitable thermal energy storage systems for practical application. L1, L2
2 Interpret and identify the storage materials L3, L4
3 Summarize and understand the sensible heat storage system L2, L3
4 Apply the knowledge to store thermal energy in optimum way. L3, L5
5 Design and develop thermal energy storage systems via simulations. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 - 2 1 1 - - - - - 2 3
CO2 3 1 1 - 2 1 1 - - - - - 2 3
CO3 3 1 1 - 2 1 1 - - - - - 2 3
CO4 3 1 1 - 2 1 1 - - - - - 2 3
CO5 3 1 1 - 2 1 1 - - - - - 2 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Thermal Energy Storage Systems and Applications, Ibrahim Dincer and Marc A. 2011
1
Rosen, Wiley.
Thermal Energy Storage: Basics, Design, Applications to Power Generation and 1984
2
Heat Supply, G. Beckmann, P.V. Gilli, Springer.
Solar Thermal Energy Storage, H.P. Garg, S.C. Mullick, Vijay K. Bhargava, 1985
3
Springer.
Advances in Thermal Energy Storage Systems: Methods and Applications, Luisa F. 2014
4
Cabeza, Elsevier.
Latent Heat-Based Thermal Energy Storage Systems 2020
5 Materials, Applications, and the Energy Market, Amritanshu Shukla, Atul Sharma,
Pascal Henry Biwolé, Apple Academic Press.
Thermal Energy Storage Technologies for Sustainability by S. Kalaiselvam, R. 2014
6
Parameshwaran

Course Name : INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code : ME2048/ME3020/ME6020
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to understand the
Concept and significance of Industrial engineering & Management and focus on financial
1.
management.
2. Plant location & layout and applications of inventory control systems.
3. Applications of Time & Motion study and Value Engineering.
 104

4. Marketing and Strategic Management.

Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
lectures
INTRODUCTION: Concept, nature and significance of Industrial Management, 4
1 economic, social, political forces affecting business operations & growth. Social
responsibility of business.
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT: Scope and functions of financial management, sources 6
of finance, Balance sheets and financial ratios, Capital Budgeting Decisions, Nature of
investment decisions, Cost of capital and its measurement, Capital Budgeting process,
2 technique of capital budgeting, Investment criteria: payback period, Accounting rate of
return method, Discount cash flow method, Net present value method and internal rate of
return method, Management of working capital, factors affecting requirement of working
capital, capital structure decisions.
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT: Plant location, Weber’s Theory of location of 6
industries, Layout and assembly line balancing- process and product layout, Government
3
policies on industrial location, Production control charts, Route & process charts,
Operation charts, Machine load charts, Process charts, Mechanical and Bar charts.
MATERIALS AND STORE CONTROL: Introduction, significance and scope. 6
Materials requirement planning, Inventory control- deterministic and probabilistic models,
4
ABC analysis, EOQ model, LIFO and FIFO in inventory system, Types of purchasing,
Centralized and De-centralized purchasing.
TIME AND MOTION STUDY: Time and motion study, Job design, job standards, work 7
5 measurement time study, work sampling, job evaluation, merit rating, method studies, Pre-
determined motion time standards (PMTS).
VALUE ENGINEERING: Introduction, applications and types of values, concepts of 5
6
value engineering, phases of value engineering studies, value analysis.
MARKETING MANAGEMENT: Nature, scope & importance of Marketing 4
management, Modern marketing concepts, Consumer vs Industrial marketing, marketing
7
mix meaning, nature and scope of international marketing, rural marketing, advertising,
sales and distribution management, channel management.
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND NEW TRENDS: Strategic management, industry 4
8
matrix plus EFAS, IFAS and SFAS tables. DMAIC – Six Sigma.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand and illustrate the plant location & layouts concepts of the L2
manufacturing plant
2 Apply the concepts of Industrial and Financial Management in L3
industries.
3 Analyze the process involved in various inventory models in industries. L4
4 Explain and evaluate the Time and motion study concepts in the design L5
the workplace layout design.
5 Apply the concepts of Value engineering and Value analysis. L3
6 Analyze the principles of Marketing & Strategic management. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 3 - 2 - - - 1 - 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 1 - 1 2
CO4 2 1 1 2 2 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 1
 105

CO5 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 - - - 1 1
CO6 1 2 1 - 3 - 1 - - 1 3 - 1 2

Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of Publication/

Reprint
1. Industrial Engineering and Management, Hicks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 2003
2. Industrial Management, W.R. Spreigel, 4th ed., John Wiley & Sons: NY 1947
3. Financial Management, Pandey, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi 2016
4. Estimating and Costing for Metal Manufacturing Industries, Creese, Adihan 1992
and Pabla, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
5. Motion and Time Study, R. Barnes, John Wiley & Sons. 2017

Course Name : RELIABILITY AND MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME2049/ME3021/ME6021
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge

1. On the role and contribution of maintenance towards achieving competitive advantage in the industries.
2. About the key concepts and issues of maintenance in both manufacturing and service organization.
3. About the various strategies, philosophy, scheme and schedules of maintenance engineering and it
applications in the industry.
4. About the safety, housekeeping, breakdown, availability and reliability indices of engineering system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Concept, classification and types of maintenance, preventive,
corrective, renovative, planned, breakdown and quality maintenance; objectives and
1 characteristics of maintenance function, organizational set-up and record keeping, 6
Organizational hierarchy, position and responsibilities of maintenance department,
control and coordination in maintenance, benefits and effects of maintenance.
MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT: Long and
short term planning and scheduling; man power planning, training and allocation,
2 requirement planning of raw materials and spare parts, inventory control of spare parts, 5
ABC analysis, FSN Approach, XYZ approach, VED approach, Estimation of
maintenance work and monitoring.
HOUSEKEEPING AND SAFETY IN MAINTENANCE: Factors governing
housekeeping, illumination, layout and equipment, air distribution, pollution and
3 ventilation, training and awareness in housekeeping; Safety: Classification and types of 5
hazards, important factors and measurement of hazards, minimize hazards and control of
accidents, fault tree analysis, safety devices and cheek list.
4 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY OF ENGINEERING SYSTEMS: Reliability
and maintainability, failure, Bathtub hazard rate concept; Reliability structures: series,
parallel, combination of series and parallel, redundancy; Quantitative estimation of
reliability of parts, mean time to failure (MTTF), mean time between failure (MTBF), 6
mean time to repair (MTTR), accuracy and confidence of reliability estimation, statistical
estimation of reliability indices, machine failure pattern: breakdown time distribution,
machine failure patter.
5 MAINTENANCE OF DRIVES AND EQUIPMENTS: Mechanical drives and
equipment’s: belts, chains, gears, couplings, brakes and their drives; pumps, compressors,
5
blowers, air-conditioners; Electrical circuits and equipment’s: power cable, line and
circuit connection, switchboard, fuse, relays, interlocks, contactors, measuring
 106

equipment’s, motors, generators; essential care and maintenance; Lubrication: manual,

forced and oil bath lubrication, testing, additives used, rectification and re-use of
lubricants; Corrosion: factors influencing and effect of pH value on corrosion, testing,
prevention, application of inhibitors and control techniques;
6 INSPECTION, TESTING, QUALITY CONTROL AND AUDIT IN
MAINTENANCE: Inspection: objectives, interval, card history and report; Testing: non-
destructive, destructive and semi-destructive testing; liquid penetration test, magnetic
particle test, ultrasound test, vibration analysis, oil analysis, eddy current testing; Quality 5
Control: importance, application of statistical quality control tools and techniques;
Performance and audit: Maintenance performance indices-BPI, EQBI, MEI, BAI, MUI,
EURRI, BEI; function and operational audit, plan and programme audit.
7 FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND CONDITION MONITORING: Objectives, methods and
purpose of faults diagnosis and condition monitoring, non-vibration and vibration based
monitoring; periodic and continuous monitoring methods and equipment’s used; fault 5
diagnosis and condition monitoring of bearings; computerized trouble shooting and
condition Monitoring;
8 BUDGET AND COST ESTINATION OF MAIANTENANCE: Cost estimation: life
cycle cost, machine breakdown cost, repair cost; spare parts and labour cost; impact of
maintenance cost, Incentive Payment: objectives, financial, non-financial and semi 5
financial incentive of maintenance staff, different types of incentive plans for
maintenance staff; Budget: objectives and functions of budget in maintenance.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the philosophies of maintenance of plant, machineries and L2
equipment’s.
2 Plan and apply the concept of maintenance on repair and renovation of L3
machine, plant and equipment’s
3 Analyse the hazards, fault and control of failure using theories, housekeeping L4
and safety in maintenance
4 Ability to conduct inspection and tests on machines and equipment’s to L4
assess their condition and availability.
5 Estimation of reliability of part, system, machine and equipment using L5
different theories of maintenance
6 Adapt computerized trouble shooting in maintenance L6

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 - - - 3 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 2 3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 1 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/Reprint

1 A text Book of Reliability and Maintenance Engineering, Alakesh Manna, I. K. 2020

International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
2 Preventive Maintenance, Terry Weriman, Reston Publishing Company. 1984
3 Principle of planned maintenance, Clifton R. H, McGraw Hill. 1983
 107

4 Maintenance Planning and Control, Enthory Kelly, EWP, New Delhi. 1984

Course Name : OPERATION RESEARCH AND SIMULATION TECHNIQUES

Course Code : ME2050/ME3022/ME6022
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of

1. Optimization using calculus and dynamic programming.
2. Linear programming, transportation and assignment problems.
3. Evolutionary algorithms for optimization and search, Taguchi, Grey-relational analysis, Response surface
methodology, Genetic algorithm based optimization and simulations.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION AND BASIC CONCEPTS: Historical Development, Art of
Modeling and simulation, Objective function, Formulation of design problems as
1 5
mathematical programming problems, Classical and advanced techniques, Basics of
operations research, OR models and applications.
OPTIMIZATION USING CALCULUS: Stationary points, Functions of single and two
variables, Global Optimum, Convexity and concavity of functions of one and two
2 variables, Optimization of function of one variable and multiple variables, Gradient 8
vectors, Lagrangian function, Hessian matrix formulation, Eigen values, Kuhn-Tucker
Conditions, Optimization problems.
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Standard and Canonical form of linear programming,
Assumptions in LP Models, Elementary operations, problem formulation, Graphical
method, Simplex method, Big-M method, Two-phase method, Revised simplex method,
3 8
Duality in LP, Dual Simplex method, Sensitivity or post optimality analysis, Other
algorithms for solving LP problems, Karmarkar’s projective scaling method, Use of
software for solving linear optimization problems.
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS: North west corner rule,
Least cost method, Vogel’s method, Stepping stone method, MODI method, Assignment
6
4 problem formulation: Optimal solution, Hungarian algorithm, Variants of assignment
problems, Travelling salesman problem.
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Representation of multistage decision process, Types
5 of multistage decision problems, Concept of sub-optimization and optimality, Recursive
equations, Forward and backward recursions, Computational procedure in dynamic
programming, Discrete versus continuous dynamic programming, Multiple state 7
variables, curse of dimensionality, Problem formulation and application of dynamic
programming in design of continuous beam and optimal geometric layout of a truss,
water allocation as a sequential process, Capacity expansion and Reservoir operation.
ADVANCED TECHNIQUES IN OPTIMIZATION & SIMULATION: Concept and
6 object of simulation, Multi objective optimization, Direct and indirect search methods,
Taguchi, Grey-relational analysis, Response surface methodology, Genetic algorithm 6
based optimization, applications in engineering problems, Algorithms and software for
simulations.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understanding the basic concept of optimization, modelling and simulation. L2
 108

2 Apply scientific methods and mathematical techniques to solve various L3

engineering problems.
3 Analysis of the various optimization techniques for engineering problems. L4

4 Recommend the various software tools for modelling and simulations of real- L5
time industrial problems.
5 Development and formulation of new models for better decision making in L6
the organization.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 1 2 - - - - 1 2 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - 1 - - 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 - 1 - 3 2 3 2 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Publication/
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
Reprint
Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice, S.S. Rao, New Age International Pvt.
1 2000
Ltd., New Delhi.
2 Linear programming, G. Hadley, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. 1990
3 Operations Research: An Introduction, H.A. Taha, 5th ed., Macmillan, New York. 1992
Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms and Examples, K. Deb, Prentice-Hall
4 1993
of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Multi-criterion Analysis in Engineering and Management, K. Srinivasa Raju, D.
5 2010
Nagesh Kumar, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Course Name : TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Course Code : ME2051/ME3023/ME6023
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To imparts the knowledge of

1 Basic concepts in Quality, Quality planning & Control and Process capabilities.
2 Statistical Process Control and use of Quality Control charts in manufacturing and service sectors.
3 Total Quality Management concepts and Quality Standard (ISO) systems.
4 Reliability and Six Sigma and applications in industries.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Introduction to quality (Services and manufacturing), Quality planning 4
and control, Quality cost, Economics of quality control, Phases of quality evolution
2 PROCESS CAPABILITY & MEASUREMENTS: Specification, tolerances and process 4
capability studies, precision reproducibility and accuracy of method measurement, Taguchi
method.
3 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Inspection and quality control, statistical quality 8
control, statistical process control, sampling plans and control charts for variables and
 109

attributes, economics of sampling charts.

4 QUALITY CONCEPTS: Quality Assurance, Total Quality Control, Total quality concept, 4
Deming’s 14 points.
5 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT: Concept, quality planning and improvement, quality 6
team and circles, just in time (JIT).
6 QUALITY STANDARDS: Definition, applications, implementation procedure and 6
requirements of Quality, ISO 9001, ISO 9002, ISO 9003, ISO 9004, ISO 14000, ISO 27000,
ISO 31000, Quality standards.
7 QUALITY & RELIABILITY: Product quality and reliability, failure data analysis and life 6
testing, redundancy in design.
8 SIX SIGMA: Concept, definition, procedure and applications, TQM and six sigma, Indian 4
industries, certification, process capabilities and case studies.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the students will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concepts of concepts of Quality & Quality standards in L2
industries.
2 Remember the capabilities of various processes in industries and L1
service sectors.
3 Apply the concepts of sampling plans and control charts for process L3
improvement in various organizations.
4 Apply the concepts of TQM, Quality Assurance and JIT in industries. L3
5 Analyze the ISO Quality standards; used in various organizations. L4
6 Estimate the reliability of various systems and Apply the Six Sigma L5
concepts in industries and service sectors.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 - - - 2 - 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 - 2 - - - 1 - 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 1 - 1 2
CO4 3 1 1 2 1 2 2 - 1 - 2 - 1 2
CO5 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 1 - - 1 2
CO6 2 2 2 - 2 1 1 - - 2 2 - 1 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of Publication/
Reprint
1 Statistical Quality Control, E. L. Grant, 6th ed., McGraw-Hill 2017
2 Statistical Quality Control, M. Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) 2016
Limited
3 Statistical Quality Control, J. M. Juran, 5th ed., McGraw-Hill 1990
4 Quality Control, Hansen & Ghare, PHI 2005
5 Statistical Quality Control, R.C. Gupta, 9th ed., Khanna Publishers 2016

Course Name : MICRO AND NANO MANUFACTURING

Course Code : ME2052/ME3024/ME6024
Credits : 4
 110

LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1. To give awareness of different techniques used in micro and nano manufacturing
2. To give in-depth idea about the measurement and metrology tools used in micro and nano manufacturing
3. To impart the knowledge about non-conventional micro and nano domain finishing approaches
4. To impart the knowledge about micro mechatronics and micro joining.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
CONCEPT OF MICRO ENGINEERING: Introduction to precision engineering,
macro milling, micro drilling, Micro-electromechanical systems, merits and
applications, Micro phenomenon in electro-photography, applications; Introduction to
1 6
bulk micromachining, Surface micromachining steps, Micro instrumentation and
applications, Micro mechatronics, Concept of Nano finishing and nano-level finishing
techniques.
MICRO-ENERGY AND CHEMICAL SYSTEM (MECS): Introduction, Space
micro-propulsion, e-Beam nanolithography: important techniques and applications,
2 5
Introduction to nanotechnology, Carbon nano-tubes: properties and structures,
Molecular logic gates and Nano level Biosensors, applications,
MECHANICAL MICROMACHINING: Principle, Micro drilling-process, tools and
applications, Diamond micro turning process, tools and applications, Micro milling and
3 grinding: principle, process characteristics, tools and applications, Micro extrusion: 5
process and applications, micro bending with Laser, Nano plastic forming and Roller
imprinting.
NON-CONVENTIONAL MICRO-NANO MANUFACTURING: Different
processes, principle and applications, Abrasive jet micro machining, WAJMM, Micro
EDM, Micro WEDM, Micro EBM: process principle, description and applications,
4 6
Micro ECM, Micro LBM: process principle, description and applications, principle of
Focused ion beams and applications, hybrid techniques applied to nano-domain non-
conventional manufacturing.
MICRO AND NANO FINISHING: Different processes, Magneto rheological
finishing, Magneto rheological abrasive flow finishing, process principle and
applications, Force analysis of MRAFF process, Magneto rheological jet finishing
5 processes, Working principle and polishing performance of MR jet machine, Elastic 4
emission machining (EEM), machine description, applications, Ion Beam Machining
(IBM): principle, mechanism of material removal, applications, Chemical Mechanical
Polishing (CMP): Schematic diagram, principle and applications.
MICRO FABRICATION: Techniques, flowchart, Introduction to Nanofabrication,
Top-down and top-up approach, dry and wet itching, micro-deposition and surface
modification, Nanofabrication using soft lithography: principle, applications, Examples
6 (Field Effect Transistor, Elastic Stamp), Manipulative techniques: process principle, 8
applications, Carbon nano materials: CN Tubes, properties and applications, CN Tube
Transistors: Description only, Diamond properties and applications, CVD Diamond
Technology, LIGA Process.
MICRO WELDING AND ANALYSIS: Laser welding, description and applications,
Defects, Electron Beam Micro-welding: Description and applications, Introduction to
micro and nano measurement, defining the scale, uncertainty, SEM and XRD of micro-
7 8
welded joints, Scanning White-light Interferometry, Optical Microscopy, Scanning
Probe Microscopy, Scanning Tunneling Microscopy and Confocal Microscopy as
applied to micro-welding analysis, Introduction to Online-Machine Metrology.

List of practical’s / mini-projects Hours

 111

1 Experiments on Micro EDM and analysis of accuracy & precision of the machined surface. 6
2 Mini project on MEMS. 10
3 Micro gear cutting and analysis of accuracy-clamping & setting errors. 6
4 Grinding- analysis of thermal effects. 6

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the students will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the traditional and advance manufacturing processes and L2
techniques
2 Identify the need and suitable applications for traditional and advanced L3
micromachining, forming joining, and deposition processes.
3 Analyze metal removal mechanisms and metal removal rate in ultra- L4
precision machining.
4 Design the fabricate MEMS devices use in micro machining and other L6
applications.
5 Explain and judge the modern micro manufacturing methods, varies from L5
basic concept to advanced mathematical modelling to estimate the process
capabilities/ responses.
6 Solve problem through experimental studies to investigate the behavior of the L3
process on micro/precision high-speed machining centers to analyze the
process capability.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO6 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1

Text Books:
Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of Publication/
No. Reprint
1 Micro and Nano-manufacturing, Mark. J. Jackson, Springer, 2006
2 Micro-fabrication and Nano-manufacturing - Pulsed water drop 2006
micromachining, Mark. J. Jackson, CRC Press
Micro-manufacturing and Nanotechnology, Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, 2006
3
Springer
4 Micro-manufacturing Processes, V. K. Jain, CRC Press 2012

Course Name : INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Course Code : ME2053/ME3025/ME6025
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the principles, strategies and advantages of industrial automation.
2 To impart the knowledge about PLC programming for a given task.
 112

3 To demonstrates problem-solving skills in automation with circuits design.

To impart the knowledge about the practical methods of automatic control of advance machines,
4
critical processes and systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
AUTOMATION: Concepts, Need and Demand of automation, Current and future 6
Trends, Components of Industrial Automation System and their functionalities, Levels
1
and Types of Automation, Mechanization vs Automation, strategies of automation,
Current emphasis in automation.
AUTOMATION CONTROLLERS: Introduction of Industrial Controllers, 6
Programmable Logic Controller: Constructions, Types, Programming Units, Memory,
2 I/O Modules, Programming methodology, Ladder Logic programming and diagrams,
timers, internal relays and counters, data handling, analogue input and output.
Application on real time industrial automation systems.
LOGIC CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS: 6
Basic elements of hydraulics and pneumatics, fluid power control elements and
standard graphical symbols, hydraulic & pneumatic cylinders and valves for pressure,
3
flow & direction control, Circuit design approach and real time examples, sequence
operation of two and more than two cylinders, Hydraulic and pneumatic safety and
their applications in clamping, traversing and releasing operations.
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM: Process versus discrete manufacturing, 6
continuous versus discrete control, computer process control, forms of computer
4
process control, closed loop versus open loop control, design of control systems, levels
of automation in industries, variables and parameters in industries.
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL: Sensor Terminology, 6
classification of sensor and transducer, their selection, temperature, light, position,
5
piezoelectric, pressure and vision sensors, acoustic emission sensing techniques,
microprocessor, microcontroller.
FACTORY AUTOMATION: Fundamentals of production lines, types of assembly 6
lines , reasons for using automated assembly lines, transfer systems in assembly lines,
automatic machines, transfer devices and machines, selection of transfer devices, linear
6
and rotary transfer mechanism, classification, conveyors, Feeders: classification,
selection criterion, feeding devices, Types of feeders: reciprocating, vibratory, screw,
rotary, centrifugal , flexible, Automated guided vehicles.
MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS AND DESIGN: Introduction to Material 6
Handling, Material Transport Equipment, analysis of Material Transport Systems,
7 Storage systems, Storage System Performance and Location Strategies, Conventional
Storage Methods and Equipment, Automation Storage Systems, Engineering Analysis
of Storage Systems.

Sr. Experiments Hours

No.
1 Students in a group will carry out projects on design and implementation of an 28
automatic modular system which can be useful in contemporary automation industries.
The methodologies will be followed the design and simulation of automated systems
using software and implementation via pneumatic controls, electro-pneumatic controls,
PLC and motion controls in Simens CoE Labs, PEC, Chandigarh.

Sr. Course Outcomes Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concept, need and demand of automation. L2
 113

2 Apply the principles, strategies and advantages of automation. L3

3 Select the level and types of factory automation. L3
4 Categories the material handling system for modern automated industry. L4
5 Justify the uses of various automation controllers in real life time industrial L5
application.
6 Design the logic control circuits for hydraulics and pneumatics operated L6
automation systems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 3 3
CO5 1 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - 1 1 1 2
CO6 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 2 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Automation production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Groover, 2009
1
M.P., Pearson Education
2 Computer Based Industrial Control, Krishna Kant, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 2000
3 Mechatronics, W. Bolton, 5th ed., Addison Wesley Longman Ltd 2010
An Introduction to Automated Process planning Systems, Tiess Chiu Chang and 2000
4
Richard A.W., Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi
5 Automated Manufacturing Systems, Morriss, S. B., McGraw Hill. 2006

Course Name : COMPUTER INTEGRATED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING

Course Code : ME2054/ME3026/ME6026
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of

Various phases of design and manufacturing of products considering different aspects of
1
manufacturability, ease of assembly and environment issues.
2 Computer integrated environment in Industries.
3 Smart factories with a concept of Industry 4.0.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
PRODUCT DESIGN: Introduction, Essential factors of product design, Phases and 8
1 approaches of design, Robust product design, parameter and tolerance design,
Aesthetic and ergonomics in product design.
COMPUTER INTEGRATED ENVIRONMENT: Integrating CAD/CAM/CAE 8
tools, objectives, product development cycle integrated with CAD/CAM tools, Concept
2 development and modelling, Introduction to finite element analysis and rapid
prototyping, product data management, Computer aided process planning, Flexible
 114

manufacturing system, Concept of group technology, Rapid tooling.

NUMERICAL CONTROL IN MACHINING PROCESSES: Introduction to NC, 8

CNC and DNC Machines, Components of CNC machines, Control systems in CNC,
3 CNC tooling and fixtures, CNC part programming: G-Codes and M-Codes, Canned
cycles, Manual part programming, Computer aided part programming.
DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ENVIRONMENT: Design for 8
manufacturing (DFM), Design for assembly (DFA), guidelines and principles of DFM
and DFA, General design principles for manufacturability, Strength and mechanical
4 factors, Material selection, Process capability, Feature tolerances, Geometric
tolerances, Assembly processes, Design for environment: Introduction, objectives and
issues, guidelines, Lifecycle assessment, Basic method, Design to minimize material
usage, Design for recyclability, Design for Energy efficiency, Design for sustainability
INDUSTRY 4.0: Introduction, Chronological development of Industry 4.0, Today's 10
factory, Globalization, Basic principles and technologies of a Smart Factory, Cyber
Physical Systems and Next Generation Sensors, Collaborative Platform and Product
5
Lifecycle Management, Internet of Things (IoT) & Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT)
& Internet of Services, Cloud Computing and Manufacturing, Security issues within
Industry 4.0 networks, Human-Robot Collaboration in Industry.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand about the essential factors and phases of product design. L2
2 Apply the CAD/CAM tools in manufacturing, service and environmental L3
aspects.
3 Apply the CNC and DNC machining processes in manufacturing. L3
4 Design for manufacturability and recyclability of product. L6
5 Estimate the energy efficiency in manufacturing. L5
6 Analyse and adapt of industry 4.0 in manufacturing. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - 2 - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Product Design and Development, Karl T. Ulrich and Steven D. Eppinger, McGraw 1999
1
Hill
2 CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, P N Rao, Tata McGraw-Hill. 2010
3 CAD/CAM, H P Groover and E W Zimmers, Prentice Hall. 1984
Engineering Design and Design for Manufacture and Structural Approach, Dickson, 1995
4
John. R and Corroda Poly, Field Stone Publisher, USA.
 115

5 Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing, Sadhu Singh, Khanna Publishers 1998
Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things, Alasdair Gilchrist, Apress, Springer 2017
6
Nature
7 The Fourth Industrial Revolution, Klaus Schwab, Penguin Random House 2017
 116

Minor Specialization in Mechanical

Engineering - Course Basket
(Student is required to opt minimum one course
each from below mentioned groups)
Minor Specialization in Mechanical Engineering - Course Basket
(Student is required to opt minimum one course each from below mentioned groups)
S. No. Course Name Course Code Credit LTP
GROUP A
1 Manufacturing Technology-I ME5001 4 3-0-2
2 Manufacturing Technology-II ME5002 4 3-1-0
GROUP B
3 Fundamentals of Thermo-Fluidics ME5003 4 3-1/2-2/2
4 Fundamentals of Heat Transfer ME5004 4 3-0-2
GROUP C
5 Strength of Materials and Concepts of Design ME5005 4 3-1/2-2/2
6 Kinematics and Dynamics of Machines ME5006 4 3-1/2-2/2
 117

GROUP-A
Course Name : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY-I
Course Code : ME5001
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with the basic tools and equipment’s used in manufacturing.
2. To introduce the practical knowledge on different aspects of manufacturing processes.
3. To familiarize with basic manufacturing processes, techniques, use of machine & tools etc.
4. To familiarize with the production of basic raw materials and secondary processes like joining, forming,
assembly.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
MANUFACTURING: Definition, Classification, Concept of product design and
1 development, Plant and shop layout, Manufacturing activities inside and outside the 6
factory, Industrial safety, Selection of raw materials, Storing, Process planning.
FOUNDRY: Raw materials: fuels, fluxes, refractory and related materials, patterns,
mould, core; Furnaces: Cupola, induction and resistance heating furnaces, core
furnace, open hearth furnace, pit furnace, Sand casting, Mechanics of solidifications;
Design: Gating system, runner and riser; Pouring time calculation, Degassing,
2 Fettling; Special Castings: Centrifugal, carbon dioxide, plaster, shell and permanent 10
moulding, precision casting, investment casting, die casting, Continuous
casting;Casting of composites: Casting Al/SiC, Al/ZrO2, Al/Al2O3 and hybrid
MMCs, properties and applications. Casting defects: Causes and their remedial
actions.
METAL FORMING: Classification, hot and cold working processes, Types:
coining, embossing, punching, blanking, rolling, forging, fullering, edging extrusion,
3 drawing, Special forming processes: rotary swaging, ring rolling, gear forming, 8
tandem rolling, thread rolling, bearing cup, spline shaft rolling, electro, hydraulic,
magneto-electro and hybrid forming; Forming defects: Causes and remedial actions.
WELDING: Definition, classification, mechanism of welding, weldability. Arc
welding: principle, types, Carbon, submerged, electro-slag, MIG, TIG and plasma
arc welding. Electrodes: Types, classification and codification, selection and
specific applications. Resistance welding: Principle, types, Spot-welding machines.
Solid state welding: Cold, diffusion, ultrasonic, explosive, friction and forge
4 10
welding. Thermochemical welding: Principle, types, applications. Gas welding:
Types, different zone and temperature of flames, applications. Oxy-flame cutting:
Principle, types, applications. Brazing and soldering: Principle, types, materials,
application in macro and micro domain, Welding defects: Causes and remedial
actions.
HEAT TREATMENT: Definition, classification, annealing, normalizing,
hardening and tempering; Iron-carbon and TTT diagram, Surface hardening
5 8
processes: carburizing, nitiriding, cyaniding and flame hardening, heat treatment
processes for non-ferrous metals.

List of Experiments:
1 Carpentry section: (i) half lap T & L-joint, (ii) pattern of hexagonal nut.
2 Fitting section: (i) leveling & surface marking, (ii) square hole making.
3 Foundry section: (i) mould making, (ii) casting hexagonal nut.
4 Smithy section: (i) round bar to cube, (ii) round bar to V-block.
 118

5 Welding section: (i) arc welding: V, L,T joints, (ii) spot welding on sheet metal.
6 Machine section: (i) turning & tapering, (ii) thread cutting.
7 Assembly and electrical basic connection: (i) study automobile engine, (ii) wiring & electrical
connection.
8 Sheet metal & Electroplating: (i) bending & joining, (ii) buffing and electroplating on sheet metal

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concept of manufacturing, product design, selection of raw L2
materials, storing, and process planning.
2 Plan and apply the different manufacturing processes to generate the ferrous, L3
nonferrous and composite materials.
3 Analyse the possible defects of manufacturing processes and ability to rectify L4
the defects.
4 Ability to select and apply the suitable manufacturing processes to make L3
desire feature of products.
5 Estimation of pouring time and solidification of metal casting L5
6 Design and adapt different gating system, runner and riser L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 1 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 1 1 3 2 - - - - - 1 1 3 1
CO6 2 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 3 2

Suggested Books
Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of Publication/
No. Reprint
1 Manufacturing Engineering and Technology; Serope Kalpakjian and Steven 2007
th
R. Schmid, 4 ed., Pearson.
2 Principles of Manufacturing Materials and Processes; Campbell-Tata McGraw 1999
Hill.
3. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Mikell P. Groover, 5th ed., Wiley 2013
Material and Processes in Manufacturing, E.P. Degarmo, Ronald A. Kohser, 2008
4.
and J. T. Black; Prentice Hall of India
5. Manufacturing Processes, P.C. Sharma, S. Chand Publication. 2008

Course Name : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY-II

Course Code : ME5002
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
 119

1. To impart the knowledge of tools and tooling system used for fabrication of metal powder, plastic and
ceramics parts.
2. To impart the knowledge about various machine tools and their applications in the conventional and non-
conventional machining processes used in metal cutting.
3. To impart the knowledge of advanced non-conventional machining techniques and their applications for
processing of conductive and non-conductive materials.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
MACHINE TOOLS: Classification, Specifications, Working principle and
1 Applications of Lathe, Milling, Drilling, Boring, Broaching, Slotting, Sawing, Shaping, 6
Planning, Grinding machines.
PRINCIPLE OF METAL CUTTING AND MACHINING OPERATIONS:
Single, Double and Multipoint point cutting tools; Advanced cutting tool materials;
Oblique cutting, Orthogonal cutting; Mechanics of chip formation; Types of chips;
2 10
Merchant Force diagram; Tool life; Machinability; Machining parameters and their
influence on machining performance, taper turning, thread cutting, knurling, indexing,
hexagonal head, spline shaft and gear cutting.
POWDER METALLURGY AND PROCESSING OF CERAMICS: Principles,
Advantages and limitations, Methods of producing powders. Applications of powder
3 6
metallurgy parts, properties, Machining and Joining of ceramic metal powder
components.
PROCESSING OF PLASTICS: Polymerization, Types of plastics, Fabrication and
4 Processing of Plastics, Calendering’s, Rotational molding, Injection and Blow 6
molding, Helmet manufacturing, Machining and Welding of plastics.
ADVANCED MACHINING PROCESSES: Need and objective of non-conventional
machining methods. ECM, EDM, WEDM, USM, EBM, LBM, AJM: Working
5 8
principle, Process parameters, Effect of process parameters on machining responses,
Applications, Introduction to rapid prototyping.
METROLOGY& INSPECTION: Limits, fits and tolerances, standard and limit
gauges, design of gauges, steps of inspection, introduction to coordinate measuring
6 machine and automated inspection technique, elements and relationship of surface 6
finish related to production methods and measurement; measuring devices used in
inspection and quality control.

List of Experiments: No. of

Hours
1 Gear cutting on milling machine 6
2 EDM of hard materials and study the effect of process parameters 4
3 Micro drilling using EDM process 4
4 Fabrication of plastic components using Injection molding setup 4
5 Product Development using 3D printing 4
6 Design and Fabrication for production of metal powder set-up 4
7 Measurement of angle using Sine Centre / Sine bar / bevel protractor 2

Sr. Course Outcomes Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the principle and description of different machine tools. L2
2 Understand the principle of metal cutting. L2
3 Analyze the effects of machining parameters on machining performance. L4
4 Apply advanced non-conventional machining processes for manufacturing of L3
 120

different industrial products.

5 Apply principle and processes of powder metallurgy for processing of L3
ceramics.
6 Compile information of the quality of product through knowledge of L6
inspection, measurement and quality control.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 3 3
CO5 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 3
CO6 2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R.Schmid- 2013
4thed., Pearson Edition.
2 Manufacturing Science, Amitava Ghosh and Asok Kumar Mallik, East-West Press Pvt 1993
Ltd., New Delhi.
3 Advance Machining Processes, V K Jain; Allied publishers, New Delhi. 2002
 121

GROUIP-B
Course Name : FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMO-FLUIDICS
Course Code : ME5003
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the importance of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics.
2 To understand the basics of thermodynamic systems and their applications.
3 To understand statics, dynamics and various approaches to fluid mechanics.
4 To correlate fundamentals of fluid mechanics with various mechanical systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
Basics and First Law of Thermodynamics: Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic 9
System, Surrounding and Boundary, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, State, Path, Process,
cycle, Quasi-static Process, Reversible and Irreversible Process, Working Substance,
1
Thermodynamic Properties, Zeroth Law, Temperature Scales, Concept of Heat and work,
First Law thermodynamics for closed and open systems, Enthalpy, Energy of an isolated
System, Control Volume, Work and Energy Equations,
Second Law of Thermodynamics: Energy Analysis of Heat Engine, Refrigerator and 7
Heat Pump, Reversibility and Irreversibility, Carnot Theorem and Carnot cycle, Equality
2 of Ideal Gas Temperature and Kelvin Temperature. Entropy: Clausius Theorem and
Clausius Inequality Principle of Entropy Increase, Applications to closed and open
System, Entropy and disorder.
Power Cycles: Air Standard Cycles: Equation of state of a gas, Properties of Mixture of 5
gases, Otto, Diesel, Dual, and Brayton Cycles, Comparison of cycles. P-v, T-s, h-s,
diagram for a Pure Substances (with special reference to water), Use of Steam Table and
3
Mollier Diagram, Vapor Cycles: Carnot and Rankine Steam Power Cycle, Actual Vapour
cycle Processes, Comparison of Carnot and Rankine cycle, Mean Temperature of Heat
Addition.
Fluid Statics and Kinematics: Basics: Properties of Fluid, Viscosity, Capillarity, Surface 9
Tension, Compressibility, Normal and Shear Stresses in Fluid Flows. Fluid Static:
Mechanics of Fluid at Rest and in Rigid Body Motion, Manometry, Hydrostatic Forces on
Fully and Partially Submerged Bodies, Stability of a Floating Body, Fluid Kinematics:
4
Langrangian and Eulerian Methods, Local and Convective Acceleration, Streamlines,
Path Lines, Streak Lines, Acceleration and Rotation of a Fluid Particle, Vorticity and
Circulation, Stream Function, Frictionless and Irrotational Flow, Velocity Potential
Function.
Dynamics of Fluid Flow: Reynolds Transport Theorem, Equation of Conservation of 7
Mass, Differential Form of Continuity Equation, Navier-Stokes Equations, Euler’s
5
Equation of Motion, Frictionless Flow - Bernoulli’s Equation, Angular Momentum
Theorem, Applications to Flow Measurement and other Real Flow Problems.
Viscous Flow: Regimes of Flow, Pressure Gradient in Steady Uniform Flow, Qualitative 5
Aspects of Viscous Flows, Exact solutions of Navier-Stokes Equations, Laminar Flow
Through a Pipe - Hagen-Poiseulli’s Flow, Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow,
6 Turbulent Flow Through a Pipe, Friction Factor, Applications to Pipe Networks. Flow Past
Immersed Bodies: Reynolds Number and Geometry Effects, Momentum Integral
Estimates, Boundary Layer Equations, Flow Over a Flat-Plate Boundary Layer, Boundary
Layers with Pressure Gradients.

List of Experiments: No. of Turns

1 To determine the metacentric height of a given vessel under unloaded condition. 1
 122

2 Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem. 1

3 To measure the velocity of flow using Pitot tube. 1
4 To determine the Coefficient of discharge through Venturi meter. 1
5 To determine the Coefficient of discharge through Orifice meter. 1
6 To determine the different types of flow Patterns by Reynolds’s experiment. 1
7 To determine the Friction factor and loss coefficients for the different pipes. 1

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand basic laws and concepts of engineering thermodynamics and fluid L2
mechanics.
2 Apply the thermo-fluidic concepts to systems used in day-to-day activities L3
and various engineering applications.
3 Examine the thermo-hydrodynamic systems by using the basic concepts. L4
4 Select the appropriate theoretically feasible system and out rightly rejects the L5
proposed Perpetual Motion Machines of any kind.
5 Analyze the performance of air-standard and vapor cycles. L4
6 Implement the fundamentals of fluid flow in various mechanical systems. L3

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - - - 1 - - 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - 1 - - 2 2 1
CO6 3 3 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - 2 2 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Thermodynamics, Yunus A. Cengel and Mike Boles, 9th ed., McGraw Hill 2019
2 Engineering Thermodynamics, P.K. Nag, McGraw Hill 2005
3 Thermodynamics, D.S. Kumar, S.K. Kataria & Sons 2013
4 Fluid Mechanics by Frank .M. White, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. 2017
5 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publications 2018
Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Yunus A. Cengel, John M. 2019
6
Cimbala, McGraw Hill Education; 4th edition

Course Name : FUNDAMENTALS OF HEAT TRANSFER

Course Code : ME5004
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
To understand the fundamental principles and laws of heat transfer and explore the implications of
1
these principles.
To formulate the models necessary to study, analyze and design heat transfer systems through the
2
application of these principles.
 123

3 To develop the problem-solving skills and practice of heat transfer in real-world applications.
Total No. of Lectures –42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER: Conduction, Convection, and Radiation Heat 10
Transfer, Steady-State one, two and multi-Dimensional heat Conduction: Plane Wall,
Insulation and R values, Radial Systems, Heat-Transfer Coefficient, Critical Thickness of
Insulation, Heat-Source Systems, Thermal Contact Resistance, Mathematical Analysis of
1
Two-Dimensional Heat Conduction, Graphical Analysis, Shape Factor, Numerical
Analysis of Resistance Elements, Gauss-Seidel Iteration, Accuracy Consideration,
Conduction-Convection System Fins with uniform cross-sections, Lumped-Heat-Capacity
System, Transient Heat Flow in a Semi-Infinite Solid.
PRINCIPLES OF CONVECTION: Viscous Flow, Inviscid Flow, Laminar Boundary 10
Layer on a Flat Plate, Energy Equation of the Boundary Layer, Thermal Boundary Layer,
Relation between Fluid Friction and Heat Transfer, Turbulent-Boundary-Layer Heat
2
Transfer, Turbulent Flow in a Tube, Empirical and Practical Relations for Forced-
Convection Heat Transfer. Empirical Relations for Pipe and Tube Flow, Flow Across
Cylinders, Spheres and Tube banks, Liquid-Metal Heat Transfer.
NATURAL CONVECTION SYSTEMS: Free-Convection: Heat Transfer on a Vertical 5
Flat Plate, Empirical Relations, Vertical planes and Cylinders, Horizontal Cylinders,
3
Plates, Inclined Surfaces, Spheres, Empirical co-relation and analogy for turbulent flow
forced convection over extension surface.
RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER: Physical Mechanism, Radiation Properties/laws, 8
Shape Factor and their relations, Heat exchange between non-black bodies, Infinite
4
Parallel Planes, cylinders, spheres, Radiation shields. Solar radiation, Effect of Radiation
on Temperature Measurement.
BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Boiling types, mechanism, Pool Boiling: Nucleate 3
5 Boiling, CHF Flow Boiling: Plug/Slug flow, types, Mechanism Film-wise / Drop wise
Condensation
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Introduction, Analysis of Heat Exchangers: LMTD for parallel 6
flow HX, LMTD for counter Flow HX, Effectiveness for parallel Flow /Counter Flow HX,
6
Design of HX, Compact Heat Exchangers, Cross flow Heat Exchangers, Some Important
Topics from current research.

List of Experiments: No. of Turns

1 To determine thermal conductivity of metal rod (Al, Brass and Steel) 1
2 To determine thermal conductivity of insulting metal. 1
3 To determine thermal conductivity of composite wall 1
4 To determine thermal conductance of heat pipe & compare it with other metal rods. 1
5 To determine thermal conductivity of insulator specimen by guarded hot plate 1
method
6 To determine heat- transfer coefficient in natural convection 1
7 To study heat transfer from a pin-fin in natural & forced convection mode 1
8 To determine heat - transfer coefficient in forced convection. 1
9 To find heat transfer coefficient for drop-wise and film-wise condensation process 1
10 To determine overall heat transfer coefficient & compare it with value obtained 1
from standard correlation
11 Study of CHF & pool-boiling 1
12 To determine effectiveness of parallel/counter flow heat exchange 1
13 To determine Stefan Boltzmann constant of radiation heat transfer. 1
14 To determine the emissivity of a non-black surface 1

Sr. Course Outcomes Knowledge Level

 124

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Bloom Level)
1. Understand basic concepts of heat transfer through different modes. L2
2. Apply the concepts of heat transfer to different devices, e.g., cooling L3
fins, heat sink, radiation shields, etc.
3. Analyze, examine, and design the thermal systems based on the L4, L5 & L6
phase-change heat transfer, e.g., condensers, boilers, power plant
equipment, etc.
4. Solve real time problems applicable to heat conduction, heat L4
convection, and heat radiation.
5. Examine the performance of heat exchangers, and optimize and L5 & L6
design the heat transfer systems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 - 2 1 1 - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Applications (SIE), Yunus A Cengel; 2017
1
Afshin J. Ghajar, McGraw Hill Education; 5th edition
2 Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, Incropera, Dewitt, Wiley India Edition. 2018
3 Engineering Heat Transfer, R.C. Sachdeva, New Age 2012
4 Heat Transfer, J.P. Holman, Mc Graw Hill 2014
5 Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, M.M. Rathor, University Science Press 2015
6 Fundamentals of Heat & Mass Transfer, C. P. Kothandaraman, New Age 2012
 125

GROUIP-C
Course Name : STRENGTH OF MATERIALS & CONCEPTS OF DESIGN
Course Code : ME5005
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the basic philosophies of strength of material and
designing of a system. The course will prepare the students to apply these to engineering and applied sciences
problems.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup Number of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Equations of static equilibrium, Concept of various 4
forces/loads, stresses and strains developed due to these forces/loads, Uniaxial
1 tensile test, Stress-strain diagrams for various types of ferrous and non-ferrous
materials, isotropic and anisotropic materials, Compression test, impact test, fatigue
test, hardness test, torsion and bending test as per ASTM standards.
SIMPLE & COMPOUND STRESSES: Concept of stresses and strains, relationship 6
between elastic constants, stresses produced in compound and simple bars due to axial
2 loading, Generalized 2-D state of stress, stresses on an arbitrary plane under Generalized 2-D
state of stress, principal stresses and principal planes, Mohr’s stress circle and ellipse of
stress
SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT IN BEAMS: Shear force (SF), Bending 5
moment (BM), Relation between rate of loading (w) with shear force (SF) and bending
3 moment (BM). SF and BM diagrams of cantilevers, simply sported beams with or without
overhang under different types of loading e.g. concentrate loads, uniformly distributed load,
uniformly varying load, moment or its combinations
BENDING AND SHEAR STRESSES IN BEAMS: Theory of pure bending, Bending 6
4 equation, Bending stresses in various cross-sectional beams under different loads, shear
stresses in beams, variation of shear stresses in different cross-sectional beams
GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATION: Scope and meaning of design with special 5
reference to machine design, design process, Concept of tearing, bearing, shearing, crushing,
5 bending, Selection of materials, Factors of safety under different loading conditions, stress-
concentration factors, Design stresses for variable and repeated loads. Endurance limit,
fatigue. Fits and tolerances and finish
FASTENERS: Cotters and cotter joints, pin fasteners knuckle joints, Screws, bolts, 8
6 preloaded bolts, bolts subjected to shear, tension and torque, eccentrically loaded bolted
joints, Welded and riveted connection, eccentrically loaded, welded and riveted connections.
SHAFTS AND AXLES: Torsion and its equation for circular shafts, determination of 8
principal stresses and maximum shear stresses in circular hallow and solid shaft due to
7
combined bending and torsion, application of torsional concepts in Shafts & Axles, Keys,
Design of Rigid & flexible Coupling

Number of
List of Experiments:
Turns
To perform Tensile Test on a given material and to determine its various mechanical properties 1
1
under tensile loading.
To perform Compressive and shear test on a given material and to determine its various 1
2
mechanical properties under compression loading.
To perform Torsion test on a given material and to determine various mechanical properties 1
3
under torsional load.
To perform Bending test and to determine the Young’s Modulus of Elasticity of the beam via 1
4
deflection formulae.
5 To determine Rockwell hardness of a given material. 1
6 To perform Impact test on a given material and to determine its resilience. 1
 126

To study and perform Fatigue test on a given material and to determine endurance strength and 1
7
limit of the material.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basic concepts of Mechanics, forces, stresses and understand the L1 & L2
basic causes of failure
2 Understand simple and complex stresses. L2
3 Beam analysis on the basis of shear force and bending moment & their L4
corresponding stresses.
4 Select the suitable materials, fits, tolerances and surface finish considering L5
manufacturing aspects.
5 Apply the causes of failure in designing/sizing of mechanical components L3, L6
under various types of loading.
6 Ability to conduct various tests on materials to assess their mechanical L4
properties.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 2 2 2 3 - - - - 2 3 - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Strength of Material - G. H. Ryder (MacMillan) 1969
2 An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids – Crandall & Dahl (Mc-Graw Hill) 2012
3 Engg. Mechanics of Solids - E. P. Popav (Pearson Education) 2003
4 Strength of Material: D S Bedi, Khanna Publishing, 6th edition 2019
5 Strength of Material by R K Rajput, S Chand 2012

Course Name : KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS OF MACHINES

Course Code : ME5006
Credits : 4
L T P : 3 -1/2- 2/2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to

1. Understand the basics of machines and mechanism.
2. Understand the concepts of kinematic diagrams, kinematic chains & mobility, mechanisms and Kinematic
analysis.
3. Understand various components used in power transmission devices.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASIC CONCEPTS: Kinematics and Dynamics of Machines, Mechanisms, Pairs,
1 kinematic chain, four bar chain, Inversions of single and double slider crank chains, 4
Degrees of freedom, Kutzbach’s equation. Grubler’s criterion, Joints..
 127

VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION: Relative motion, displacement, velocity,

acceleration diagrams of different types of mechanisms, Relative velocity method,
2 6
instantaneous center method; Kennedy theorem, Klien’s construction, Coriolis
component, Numerical problems.
CAMS: Type of cams and followers, definition-basic circle & least radius, angle of
ascent. Dwell, Descent & Action; Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration diagrams of
3 5
followers, Simple harmonic motion, Uniform and maximum velocity, acceleration and
retardation, cycloidal motion.
GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS: Toothed gears: types, definitions and terminology,
pressure angle, path contact, arc of contact and approach, law of gearing, gear tooth
profiles, involute and cycloidal gear systems, interference in involute gears; Gear
4 8
Trains: Types, simple and compound, epicyclic and reverted gear trains; Sun and
planet gear, differential; Velocity ratio of worm and worm wheel, Helical and spiral
gears; spiral angle and efficiency; Numerical problems.
GYROSCOPE: Definition, axis of spin and precision, gyroscopic couple and effect on
5 movement of ships and vehicles, stability of two and four wheel automobile; Numerical 4
problems.
FLYWHEEL AND GOVERNORS: Turning moment and crank movement diagrams,
dynamics of simple horizontal and vertical engine. Fluctuation of speed, co-efficient of
fluctuation of speed and energy, Punching press. Simple problems; Governors:
6 8
Functions, types and characteristics of governors, Sensitivity, stability, isochronism
and hunting of governors, governor effort and controlling force curve, effect of sleeve
friction. Numerical problems.
BALANCING: Classification, static and dynamic balancing, Primary and secondary
balancing of rotary and reciprocating masses, swaying couple and variation of tractive
7 7
effort, hammer blow, partial balancing of locomotive, multi cylinder in line engines,
balancing of V-engines.

List of Experiments: No. of Hrs

To find displacement, velocity and acceleration of slider in a single slider crank 2
1
mechanism for different crank angles and draw various graphs.
2 Verify experimentally the gyroscopic couple is given by T = I.ω. ωp 2
3 Draw experimentally the approximate straight line be watts mechanism. 2
Find out the positions of the four weights, so that the system becomes statically & 2
4
dynamically balanced.
Find the moment of inertia of a given body about an axis passing through C.G. and 2
5 perpendicular to the plane of the body also calculate the minimum oscillation of the point
of suspension.
Balance experimentally as far as possible the known unbalanced force due to a rotating 2
weight by introducing two balancing weights in two different planes
6
(a) Balancing planes on either side of unbalanced force
(b) Balancing planes on the same side of unbalanced force.
Determination of characteristics curve of the Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell Governors 2
7
using universal governor set up.

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand and apply concepts of kinematics and dynamics on the mechanism L2 & L3
& machines.
2 Develop various cam profiles for engines and machines. L6
3 Analyze and develop gear trains required for various applications. L4
4 Understand the working of gyroscope, flywheel and governors. L2
5 Ability to conduct various tests on machine & mechanism to assess their output L4
 128

characteristics.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Theory of Machines, V.P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi 2014
2 Theory of Machines, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna publishers, New Delhi 1994
3 Theory of Machines, Shigley, Tata McGraw Hill. 1981
4 Mechanism & Machine Theory, J.S. Rao & R.V. Dukhipati, Wiley Eastren Ltd. 1992
Theory of Mechanisms, Amitabh Gosh & A.K. Mallik, East West Press Machines
5 2006
Private Ltd.
6 Theory of Machines, S. S. Rattan, McGraw Hill Education (India) 2014